Canon | EOS M200 | User guide | Canon EOS M200 User guide

Canon EOS M200 User guide
ENGLISH
Advanced User Guide
Introduction
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the “Safety
Instructions” (=30) and “Handling Precautions” (=33). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come
out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store this
manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images
cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held
liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images
recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the
memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment. Also be aware
that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack LP-E12
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E12E*
Strap
* Battery Charger LC-E12E comes with a power cord.
zz The camera does not come with a memory card (=11), interface cable, or HDMI
cable.
zz For details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see “Instruction
Manuals” (=4).
zz If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
zz Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
zz When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (=4).
zz The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually.
Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with
the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
3
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides
basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions.
The Advanced User Guide (this PDF file), which provides
complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon
website to a computer or other device.
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or
other device.
Download site
Advanced User Guide/Supplemental Information
www.canon.com/icpd
Lens Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
Software Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
zz To view the PDF files, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is required.
zz Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
zz Double-click the downloaded PDF file to open it.
zz To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section
or the like.
4
Instruction Manuals
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
Using QR Code
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF files) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR code.
www.canon.com/icpd
zz A software app is required to read the QR code.
zz Select your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User
Guide/Instruction Manuals.
zz Select [5: Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.
5
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (=44).
1
zz Upon purchase, charge the battery
to start using (=42).
Insert the card (=46).
2
zz With the card’s label facing toward
the back of the camera, insert it
into the card slot.
Attach the lens (=52).
3
zz Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on
the camera to attach the lens.
zz Remove the lens cap.
Prepare to shoot.
4
(2)
6
(1)
zz Press (1) as you turn (2) slightly,
and then release (1).
zz Turn (2) a little more until it clicks.
Quick Start Guide
5
Turn the camera on (=50).
6
Set the shooting mode switch
to <A> (=72).
7
8
zz All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
Focus on the subject (=57).
zz [p] (an AF point) appears over any
face detected.
zz Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Take the picture (=57).
zz Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
7
Quick Start Guide
9
Review the picture.
zz The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
zz To display the image again, press
the <x> button (=256).
zz To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (=256).
zz To delete images, see “Erase Images” (=277).
8
About This Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
: Indicates the dial.
<W> <X> <Y> <Z> : Indicates the corresponding direction on the <V>
cross keys.
<Q> <0>
: Indicates the Quick Control/Setting button.
*
: Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the
operation for the button you pressed, as timed after
you release the button.
yyIn addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant
operations and functionality.
M
=***
: A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is
available only in advanced shooting modes ([d], [s], [f],
or [a]) or [k] movie modes ([k] or [M]).
:Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
9
About This Manual
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample
Photos
zz Instructions apply to the camera with the power on (=50).
zz It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to
their defaults.
zz Screens in instructions show the state with [Menu display] in
[j: Display level settings] set to [Guided].
zz The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF‑M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM lens as an example.
zz The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are
for instructional purposes only.
zz In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount
adapter is used.
10
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity.
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (=433).
zz SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance
(fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size.
For details, see =498.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
11
Chapters
Introduction
2
Preparation and Basic Operations
41
Basic Shooting Modes
71
Advanced Shooting Modes
103
Shooting Settings
115
Flash Photography
243
Playback Settings
253
Wireless Settings
317
Function Settings
423
Custom Functions (C.Fn)
457
My Menu
463
Reference
471
12
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List.......................................................................................3
Instruction Manuals.................................................................................4
Quick Start Guide....................................................................................6
About This Manual..................................................................................9
Compatible Cards.................................................................................11
Chapters...............................................................................................12
Contents................................................................................................13
Contents by Purpose............................................................................23
Index to Features..................................................................................26
Safety Instructions................................................................................30
Handling Precautions............................................................................33
Part Names...........................................................................................36
Preparation and Basic Operations
41
Charging the Battery.............................................................................42
Inserting/Removing the Battery.............................................................44
Inserting/Removing the Card................................................................46
Using the Screen..................................................................................49
Turning on the Power............................................................................50
Attaching/Detaching a Lens..................................................................52
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses..................................................54
Basic Operations...................................................................................56
Setting the Screen Display Level..........................................................60
Menu Operations and Settings.............................................................63
13
Contents
Touch-Screen Operation.......................................................................68
Quick Control........................................................................................69
Basic Shooting Modes
71
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)............................72
Special Scene Mode.............................................................................80
Self Portrait Mode.................................................................................82
Portrait Mode........................................................................................83
Smooth Skin Mode................................................................................84
Landscape Mode..................................................................................85
Sports Mode..........................................................................................86
Close-up Mode......................................................................................87
Food Mode............................................................................................88
Night Portrait Mode...............................................................................89
Handheld Night Scene Mode................................................................90
HDR Backlight Control Mode................................................................91
Silent Mode...........................................................................................92
Special Scene Mode Precautions.........................................................93
Creative Filters Mode............................................................................96
Advanced Shooting Modes
103
Program AE Mode (P).........................................................................104
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv).............................................................106
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)...........................................................108
Manual Exposure Mode (M)................................................................110
14
Contents
Shooting Settings
Still Photo Shooting
115
116
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting.........................................................117
Image Quality......................................................................................122
Still Image Aspect Ratio......................................................................125
Image Review Time............................................................................127
Lens Aberration Correction.................................................................128
Drive Mode..........................................................................................133
Self-Timer............................................................................................135
Exposure Compensation.....................................................................137
ISO Speed Settings............................................................................138
Auto Lighting Optimizer.......................................................................141
Highlight Tone Priority.........................................................................142
Metering Mode....................................................................................143
Metering Timer....................................................................................145
Exposure Simulation...........................................................................146
White Balance.....................................................................................147
White Balance Correction...................................................................152
Color Space........................................................................................153
Picture Style Selection........................................................................154
Picture Style Customization................................................................157
Picture Style Registration....................................................................160
Long Exposure Noise Reduction........................................................162
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction.......................................................163
Touch Shutter......................................................................................165
15
Contents
AF Operation.......................................................................................167
AF Method..........................................................................................170
Eye Detection AF................................................................................180
Continuous AF....................................................................................181
Focus Mode........................................................................................182
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF.............................................183
AF-Assist Beam Firing........................................................................184
Manual Focus.....................................................................................185
Setting MF Peaking.............................................................................187
Image Stabilization..............................................................................188
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)...................................................................189
Type of Digest Movie..........................................................................190
Remote Control Shooting....................................................................191
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions................................................192
Movie Recording
195
Tab Menus: Movie Recording.............................................................196
Movie Mode........................................................................................198
Movie Recording Quality.....................................................................205
Movie Self-Timer.................................................................................212
Sound Recording................................................................................213
Time-lapse Movies..............................................................................215
Video Snapshots.................................................................................224
Miniature Effect Movie.........................................................................229
Movie Servo AF...................................................................................231
Movie Digital IS...................................................................................233
16
Contents
Other Menu Functions........................................................................235
General Movie Recording Cautions....................................................240
Flash Photography
243
Flash Photography..............................................................................244
Flash Exposure Compensation...........................................................246
FE Lock...............................................................................................247
Flash Control.......................................................................................248
Playback Settings
253
Tab Menus: Playback Settings............................................................254
Image Playback..................................................................................256
Magnified Image Display.....................................................................259
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)...............................................260
Movie Playback...................................................................................261
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes.............................................264
Frame Extraction.................................................................................266
Digest Movie Editing...........................................................................268
Playback on a TV Set..........................................................................270
Protect Images....................................................................................272
Rotate Still Photos..............................................................................275
Change Movie Orientation Information...............................................276
Erase Images......................................................................................277
Prepare to Print...................................................................................281
Print Images........................................................................................283
17
Contents
Print Ordering......................................................................................284
Photobook Set-up...............................................................................288
Creative Filters....................................................................................291
Creative Assist....................................................................................294
Red-Eye Correction............................................................................296
Create Album......................................................................................297
Cropping.............................................................................................300
Resizing..............................................................................................302
Rating..................................................................................................303
Slide Shows........................................................................................306
Set Image Search Conditions.............................................................308
Image Jump by Swiping......................................................................310
Playback Information Display..............................................................312
AF Point Display.................................................................................314
View from Last Seen...........................................................................315
Wireless Settings
317
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings.............................................................318
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection............................................319
Connecting to a Smartphone..............................................................321
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi...................................................349
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi........................................................357
Sending Images to a Web Service......................................................367
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points...................................................382
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control..........................................387
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.......................................................................390
18
Contents
Registering Multiple Connection Settings...........................................392
Wi-Fi Settings......................................................................................393
Bluetooth Settings...............................................................................394
Changing the Nickname......................................................................395
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices..........396
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings.........................................399
Airplane Mode.....................................................................................401
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default.......................402
View Info Screen.................................................................................403
Virtual Keyboard Operations...............................................................404
Responding to Error Messages..........................................................405
Wireless Communication Function Notes...........................................416
Security...............................................................................................418
Checking Network Settings.................................................................419
Wireless Communication Status.........................................................420
Function Settings
423
Tab Menus: Function Settings.............................................................424
Select Folder.......................................................................................426
File Numbering....................................................................................428
Auto Rotate.........................................................................................431
Adding Orientation Information to Movies...........................................432
Format Card........................................................................................433
Eco Mode............................................................................................435
Power Saving......................................................................................436
Display Brightness..............................................................................437
19
Contents
Date/Time/Zone..................................................................................438
Language............................................................................................441
Shutter Button Function for Movies.....................................................442
Video System......................................................................................443
Touch Control......................................................................................444
Screen Autolock Settings....................................................................445
Beeping...............................................................................................446
HDMI Resolution.................................................................................447
HDMI HDR Output..............................................................................448
Shooting Information Display..............................................................449
Reverse Display..................................................................................451
Display Performance...........................................................................452
Reset Camera.....................................................................................453
Copyright Information..........................................................................454
Manual/Software URL.........................................................................456
Certification Logo Display...................................................................456
Firmware.............................................................................................456
Custom Functions (C.Fn)
457
Setting Custom Functions...................................................................458
Custom Function Setting Items...........................................................459
20
Contents
My Menu
463
Tab Menus: My Menu..........................................................................464
Registering My Menu..........................................................................465
Reference
471
Software..............................................................................................472
Importing Images to a Computer........................................................474
Household Power Outlet Accessory....................................................476
Troubleshooting Guide........................................................................477
Error Codes.........................................................................................493
Performance Data...............................................................................494
Information Display.............................................................................501
Index...................................................................................................512
21
22
Contents by Purpose
Shooting
zz Shoot automatically
 =71–=101 (Basic
shooting modes)
zz Shoot continuously
 =133 (i Continuous shooting)
zz Take a picture of yourself in
a group
 =135 (j Self-timer)
zz Freeze the action
 =106 (s Shutter-priority AE)
zz Blur the action
zz Shoot with effects of your choice
 =78 (Creative Assist)
zz Blur the background
 =108 (f Aperture-priority AE)
zz Keep the background in sharp
focus
zz Adjust the image brightness
(exposure)
 =137 (Exposure compensation)
zz Shoot in low light
 =244 (I Flash photography)
 =138 (ISO speed settings)
zz Shoot without flash
 =249 (b Flash off)
zz Shoot fireworks at night
 =112 (Bulb exposure)
zz Shoot with creative effects
 =96 (Creative filters)
zz Take a Self Portrait
 =82 (J Self Portrait)
zz Record movies
 =195 (k Movie recording)
23
Contents by Purpose
Image Quality
zz Shoot with image effects matching  =154 (Picture Style selection)
the subject
zz Make a large-size print of
the picture
 =122 (73, 83, 1, F)
zz Take a lot of pictures
 =122 (7a, 8a, b)
AF (Focusing)
zz Change the point of focus
 =172 (AF method)
zz Shoot a moving subject
 =168 (Servo AF)
 =86 (5 Sports)
Playback
zz View photos or movies on the
camera
 =256 (x Playback)
zz Find photos or movies quickly
 =260 (Index display)
=310 (Image jump with i)
=308 (Set image search
conditions)
zz Rate images
 =303 (Rating)
zz Protect important photos or
movies from accidental erasure
 =272 (K Protect images)
zz Erase unneeded photos or movies  =277 (L Erase images)
zz Auto play back photos and movies  =306 (Slide shows)
zz View photos and movies on a TV set  =270 (Playback on a TV set)
zz Adjust the screen brightness
 =437 (Screen brightness)
zz Apply special effect to images
 =291 (Creative filters)
24
Contents by Purpose
Wireless Features
zz Send images to a smartphone
 =321 (Connecting to a
smartphone)
zz Automatically send images
to a computer
 =349 (Connecting to a
computer via Wi-Fi)
zz Print photos
 =357 (Connecting to a printer
via Wi-Fi)
zz Share images online
 =367 (Sending images to
a web service)
25
Index to Features
Power
AF
zz Charging the battery (=42)
zz AF operation (=167)
zz Battery level (=51)
zz AF method (=170)
zz Eco mode (=435)
zz AF point selection (=175)
zz Power saving (=436)
zz Eye Detection AF (=180)
Cards
zz Formatting (=433)
zz Cards compatible with movie
recording (=497)
Lens
zz Attaching (=52, =54)
zz Detaching (=53, =55)
zz Release shutter without lens (=461)
Basic Settings
zz Date/Time/Zone (=438)
zz Language (=441)
zz Video system (=443)
zz Beeper (=446)
zz Clearing all camera settings
(=453)
zz Copyright information (=454)
Screen
zz Tilting (=49)
zz Touch control (=68)
zz Brightness (=437)
zz Screen autolock settings (=445)
zz Display performance (=452)
26
zz Continuous AF (=181)
zz Electronic manual focus (=183)
zz AF-assist beam (=184)
zz Manual focusing (=185)
zz MF peaking settings (=187)
Metering
zz Metering mode (=143)
Drive
zz Maximum burst (=124)
zz Drive mode (=133)
zz Self-timer (=135)
Image Recording Settings
zz Creating/Selecting a folder
(=426)
zz File numbering (=428)
Index to Features
Image Quality
zz Image quality (=122)
Shooting
zz Shooting mode (=38)
zz Still image aspect ratio (=125)
zz Quick Control (=69)
zz Lens aberration correction
(=128)
zz Creative Assist (=78)
zz ISO speed (still photos) (=138)
zz Depth-of-field preview (=109)
zz Creative filters (=96)
zz Auto Lighting Optimizer (=141)
zz Touch shutter (=165)
zz Highlight tone priority (=142)
zz Magnified view (=177)
zz White balance (=147)
zz Remote control (=191)
zz Color space (=153)
zz Shooting information display
(=449)
zz Picture Style (=154)
zz Noise reduction for long exposures
(=162)
zz Grid display (=449)
zz Noise reduction for high ISO
speeds (=163)
zz Error codes (=493)
zz Reverse display (=451)
Exposure
zz Exposure compensation with
M+ISO Auto (=111)
zz Exposure compensation (=137)
zz Exposure simulation (=146)
zz AE lock (=189)
zz Safety shift (=459)
Flash
zz Flash (=244)
zz Flash exposure compensation
(=246)
zz FE lock (=247)
zz Built-in flash function settings
(=251)
27
Index to Features
Movie Recording
Playback
zz Autoexposure recording (=198)
zz Image review time (=127)
zz Manual exposure recording
(=200)
zz Single-image display (=256)
zz Movie recording size (=205)
zz Magnified view (=259)
zz Sound recording (=213)
zz Index display (=260)
zz Wind filter (=213)
zz Movie playback (=261)
zz Attenuator (=214)
zz Time-lapse movie (=215)
zz Editing a movie’s first and last
scenes (=264)
zz Video snapshot (=224)
zz Frame Grab (4K) (=266)
zz Movie Servo AF (=231)
zz Remote control shooting (=235)
zz Viewing images on a television
(=270)
zz ISO speed (movie) (=236)
zz Protect (=272)
zz Touch playback (=258)
zz HDMI output (=238)
zz Image rotation (=275)
zz Auto slow shutter (=239)
zz Erasing (=277)
zz Adding rotation information
(=432)
zz Slide show (=306)
zz Shutter button function for movies
(=442)
zz Setting image search conditions
(=308)
zz Rating (=303)
zz Image browsing (Jump display)
(=310)
zz Playback information display
(=312)
zz AF point display (=314)
zz Auto rotate (=431)
zz HDMI resolution (=447)
zz HDR output (=448)
zz Shooting information display
(=506)
28
Index to Features
Image Editing
Wireless Features
zz Creative filters (=291)
zz Connect to smartphones (=321)
zz Red-eye correction (=296)
zz Auto send images to smartphones
(=335)
zz Video snapshot album (=297)
zz Cropping JPEGs (=300)
zz Resizing JPEGs (=302)
Print Ordering
zz Print order (DPOF) (=284)
zz Photobook Set-up (=288)
Customization
zz Remote control (EOS Utility)
(=349)
zz Auto send images to computers
(=354)
zz Print from Wi-Fi printers (=357)
zz Upload to Web service (=367)
zz Connect to a wireless remote
control (=387)
zz Display level settings (=60)
zz Geotagging Images (=396)
zz Custom Functions (C.Fn) (=458)
zz Clear wireless settings (=402)
zz My Menu (=465)
Software
zz Downloading and Installing
(=472)
zz Software Instruction Manuals
(=473)
29
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING:
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
zz Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if
swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical
assistance.
zz Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
zz Do not disassemble or modify the product.
zz Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
zz Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
zz Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence
of smoke or a strange smell.
zz Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
zz Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
zz Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
zz Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the
lens cap attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
zz Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
zz Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
yyUse batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
yyDo not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
yyDo not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
yyDo not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
yyDo not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
yyWhen disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing,
flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact,
flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek
immediate medical assistance.
30
Safety Instructions
zz Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
yyPeriodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
yyDo not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
yyDo not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
yyDo not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
zz Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
zz Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
zz Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use
when the product is still warm in temperature.
zz Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
zz Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
zz Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 - 40 °C
(41 - 104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
zz Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and
blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar
equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people
with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
zz Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of
electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
31
Safety Instructions
CAUTION:
Denotes the risk of injury.
zz Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
zz Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using
the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
zz Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
zz Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when
touched.
zz Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product
attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the
product or expose the product to strong impacts.
zz Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
zz Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
zz Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
zz Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
zz If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.
32
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
zz This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to
physical shock.
zz The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If the
camera gets wet, contact a Canon Service Center immediately. Wipe off
any water droplets with a clean, dry cloth, and if the camera is exposed
to salty air, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
zz Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
zz Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
zz Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field
such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the
camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large
antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera malfunction or
destroy image data.
zz Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
zz The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
zz Do not block the built-in flash or shutter curtain operations with your
finger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
zz Use a commercially available blower brush to remove dust from the
lens or other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to
clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
zz Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is
to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause
camera malfunction.
zz If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust
to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
33
Handling Precautions
zz If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the
camera or remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera off and wait
until the moisture has fully evaporated before resuming use.
Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not
remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the
ambient temperature.
zz If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while
the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a
while to check that the camera is still working.
zz Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust
and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
zz If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its
functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time
or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have
the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the
camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
zz The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still
photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
zz If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
Screen
zz Although the screen is manufactured with very high precision technology
with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be
dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is
not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
zz If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few
days.
zz The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
34
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
zz Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
zz Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
zz Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
zz Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic
field, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone
to having static electricity.
zz Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
zz Store the card in a case.
zz Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Smudges on the Image Sensor
zz Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.
If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a Canon
Service Center.
Lens
zz After detaching the lens from the camera, put down
the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens
cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical
contacts (1).
(1)
35
Part Names
(6)(7)
( 1)
( 2)
(8)
(17)
(18)
( 9)
( 10)
( 3)
( 4)
( 11)
( 12)
( 13)
( 14)
( 15)
( 16)
( 5)
( 19)
( 20) ( 21)
( 22)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
36
Shutter button
<6> Dial
EF-M lens mount index
Image sensor
Contacts
Power button
Shooting mode switch
Flash
Strap mount
<I> Flash up lever
Terminal cover
AF-assist beam/Red-eye
reduction/Self-timer/Remote
control lamp
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
Card slot cover
Lens release button
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
<k> HDMI OUT terminal
<g> Digital terminal
Tripod socket
DC coupler cord hole
Battery compartment cover
Body cap
Part Names
(6)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(12)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(11)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Screen
<V> Focal plane mark
Microphone
Access lamp
Speaker
Serial number (body number)
<M> Menu button
<W/O/L> Up/Exposure
compensation/Erase button
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
<Y/A> Left/AE lock/FE lock
button
<X/B> Down/Info button
<x> Playback button
Movie shooting button
<Z/I> Right/Flash button
<Q/0> Quick Control/Setting
button
37
Part Names
Shooting Mode Switch/Shooting Modes
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) A: Scene Intelligent Auto Mode (=72)
All you do is press the shutter button. Fully automatic shooting, with settings
determined by the camera.
(2) z: Still Photo Mode
For still photo shooting. You can let the camera determine settings for the
subject or scene, or you can take more control over shooting. To select a
shooting mode, you can tap a shooting mode icon in the upper left of the
shooting screen. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a shooting mode, then
press <0>.
Advanced Shooting Modes
d
s
Program AE (=104)
Shutter-priority AE (=106)
f
Aperture-priority AE (=108)
a
Manual exposure (=110)
D: Hybrid Auto Mode (=72)
38
Part Names
Special Scene Mode
J
Self Portrait (=82)
P
Food (=88)
2
Portrait (=83)
6
Night Portrait (=89)
K
Smooth skin (=84)
F
Handheld Night Scene
(=90)
3
Landscape (=85)
G
HDR Backlight Control
(=91)
5
Sports (=86)
I
Silent Mode (=92)
4
Close-up (=87)
Miniature effect (=99)
Creative Filters Mode (=96)
I
Grainy B/W (=98)
c
G
Soft focus (=98)
A
HDR art standard (=99)
X
Fish-eye effect (=98)
B
HDR art vivid (=99)
K
Water painting effect
(=98)
C
HDR art bold (=99)
H
Toy camera effect (=98)
D
HDR art embossed (=99)
(3) k: Movie Mode
For movie recording. To select a shooting mode, you can tap a shooting
mode icon in the upper left of the shooting screen. Press the <Y> <Z>
keys to select a shooting mode, then press <0>.
k
Movie auto exposure (=198)
M
Movie manual exposure (=200)
39
Part Names
Battery Charger LC-E12E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E12 (=42).
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Battery pack slot
Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp
Power cord
Power cord socket
(5)
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
40
Preparation and Basic
Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting
and the basic camera operations.
41
Charging the Battery
the protective cover
1Detach
provided with the battery.
insert the battery into the
2Fully
charger.
zz Do the opposite to remove the battery.
the battery.
3zRecharge
z Connect the power cord to the charger
and insert the plug into a power outlet.
zz Recharging starts automatically and the
charge lamp lights up in orange.
zz When the battery is fully recharged, the
full-charge lamp will light up in green.
zz It takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge
a completely exhausted battery at
room temperature (23°C/73°F). The
time required to charge the battery will
vary greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery’s remaining
capacity.
zz For safety reasons, charging in low
temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F) will
take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
42
Charging the Battery
zz Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
zz Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to
be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its
capacity.
zz After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
zz When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery performance.
zz The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery
charger.
zz If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having
been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its
service life.
Purchase a new battery.
zz After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 5 sec.
zz The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E12.
43
Inserting/Removing the Battery
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12 into the camera.
Insertion
the battery compartment
1Slide
cover to open it.
the battery.
2zInsert
z Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
zz Insert the battery until it locks in place.
the cover.
3zClose
z Slide the cover until it snaps shut.
zz You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E12.
zz After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back
any further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
44
Inserting/Removing the Battery
Removal
(1)
the battery compartment
1Open
cover.
zz Turn the camera off.
zz Check that the access lamp (1) is off,
then open the cover.
the battery.
2zRemove
z Press the battery lock lever as shown by
the arrow and remove the battery.
zz To prevent short-circuits, always attach
the included protective cover (=42)
to the battery.
45
Inserting/Removing the Card
The captured images are recorded onto the card.
zz Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1Open the card slot cover.
(1)
the card.
2zInsert
z Insert the card with the label facing
the back of the camera until it clicks in
place.
3Close the cover.
46
Inserting/Removing the Card
Removal
(1)
the cover.
1zOpen
z Turn the camera off.
zz Check that the access lamp (1) is off,
then open the cover.
zz If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen,
close the cover.
the card.
2zRemove
z Gently push in the card, then let it go to
eject.
zz Pull the card straight out, then close the
cover.
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera (=433).
zz The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of
the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
47
Inserting/Removing the Card
zz When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred.
Do not open the card slot cover or remove the battery at this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.
Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
yyRemoving the card.
yyRemoving the battery.
yyShaking or striking the camera.
yyUnplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power outlet
accessories (sold separately) are used).
zz If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start
from 0001 (=428).
zz If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert
the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images
and then format the card with the camera (=433). The card may then return
to normal.
zz Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not
expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts,
contact failure may result.
zz Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
48
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
Tilting the Screen Upward
zz The screen lifts upward and opens to
about 180°.
zz When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
zz When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
zz Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the camera.
49
Turning on the Power
To turn the camera on, press the power
button. Press it again to turn the camera
off.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
If you turn on the power and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see
=438 to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see =441.
zz [Saving...] is displayed if you turn off the camera during image recording to the
card, and the camera will turn off after recording is finished.
50
Turning on the Power
Battery Level Indicator
: Battery level is sufficient.
: Battery level is low, but the camera
can still be used.
: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
: Charge the battery.
zz Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
yyPressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
yyActivating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
yyUsing the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
yyUsing the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
zz The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
zz The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses may
exhaust the battery faster than others.
zz In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a
sufficient battery level.
51
Attaching/Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1zRemove
z Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
the lens.
2zAttach
z Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
3Remove the front lens cap.
52
Attaching/Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
(3)
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
(2)
(1)
zz Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
zz Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of
vision.
zz Turn off the camera before attaching or detaching lenses.
zz If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not
touch the rotating part.
zz Shooting angle of view
-- Because the image area is smaller than 35mm film format, the effective angle
of view corresponds to approx. 1.6 times the lens’s indicated focal length.
Image area (approx.) (22.3×14.9 mm/0.88×0.59 in.)
35mm film format (36×24 mm/1.42×0.94 in.)
zz For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual
(=4).
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body
cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
53
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M.
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1zRemove
z Remove the caps on the lens, adapter,
and body.
(1)
(2)
the lens to the adapter.
2zAttach
z Align the red or white mount index on
the lens with the corresponding mount
index on the adapter and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Red index
White index
the adapter to the camera.
3zAttach
z Align the white mount indexes (3) on the
adapter and camera and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
54
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
the lens’s focus mode switch
4Set
to <AF>.
zz <AF> stands for autofocus.
zz <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
Detaching the Lens
5Remove the front lens cap.
pressing the lens release
1While
button, turn the adapter as shown
by the arrow.
zz Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
the lens from the adapter.
2zDetach
z Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
zz Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
zz For lens precautions, see =53.
zz When using a lens that is heavier than the camera, hold the camera by the lens
when you shoot or carry it.
zz With EF lenses that incorporate a tripod mount (such as super telephoto lenses),
attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the lens. When using lenses without a
tripod mount, attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the mount adapter.
55
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see =49.
Normal angle
56
Low angle
Basic Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway.
Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture value) is displayed for approx.
8 sec. or as set for the metering timer.*
* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Pressing Completely
This action shoots.
zz Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
zz Hold the camera steady.
zz Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
zz If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first, or if
you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately,
the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
zz Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to shootingready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
57
Basic Operations
<6> Dial
While looking at the screen, turn the
<6> dial.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture value, etc.
58
Basic Operations
INFO Button
Each press of the <B> button changes
the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still
photos.
59
Setting the Screen Display Level
You can set how information is displayed on the screen according to your
preference. Change the settings as necessary.
the main tabs.
1zDisplay
z Press the <M> button to display the
main tabs.
the [j] tab.
2zSelect
z Press the <Y> <Z> keys of the cross
keys to select the [j] tab.
60
Setting the Screen Display Level
Menu Display
You can select the display type from [Guided] or [Standard]. If you set
[Guided], main tab descriptions are provided when you press the <M>
button. If you set [Standard], the menu screen is displayed immediately
after you press the <M> button. By default, it is set to [Guided].
1Select [Menu display].
2Select the display type.
(1)
(1) Main tabs
zz When [Guided] is set, the [9 (My Menu)] tab does not appear. To set My
Menu (=465), change the menu display level to [Standard].
61
Setting the Screen Display Level
Feature Guide
A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use
Quick Control or menu settings. By default, it is set to [Enable].
1Select [Feature guide].
2Select [Enable].
zz Sample screens
Quick Control screen
Menu screen
(1)
(1)
(1) Feature guide
zz To clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.
62
Menu Operations and Settings
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
<M> button
Screen
<V> Cross keys
(4)
(5)
<0> button
Dial
Menu Screen
<A> mode
Movie mode
Still photo mode (in advanced shooting modes)
zz The menu tabs and items displayed vary depending on the shooting mode.
63
Menu Operations and Settings
Menu Setting Procedure
zz With [j: Menu display] set to [Guided]
(1)
the main tabs.
1zDisplay
z When you press the <M> button,
the main tabs (1) and a description of
the selected tab will appear.
a main tab.
2zSelect
z Each time you press the <Y> <Z>
keys of the cross keys, the main tab
(group of functions) will switch.
zz You can also select by turning the
<6> dial.
the menu screen.
3zDisplay
z Press <0> to display the menu
screen.
zz To return to the main tab screen, press
the <M> button.
a secondary tab.
4zSelect
z Press the <Y> <Z> keys of the cross
keys to select a secondary tab.
zz You can also select by turning the
<6> dial.
a setting item.
5zSelect
z Press the <W> <X> keys of the
cross keys to select the item, then
press <0>.
64
Menu Operations and Settings
an option.
6zSelect
z Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys
of the cross keys to select the desired
option. (Some options are selected with
the <W> and <X> keys, and others are
selected with the <Y> and <Z> keys.)
zz The current setting is indicated in blue.
an option.
7zSetz Press
<0> to set it.
zz If you change the setting from the
default, it will be indicated in blue
(available only for the menu items under
the [z] tab).
the setting.
8zExit
z Press the <M> button twice to exit
the menu and return to shooting-ready
state.
zz In steps 2 to 8, you can also tap on the screen to perform the operation (=68).
zz The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that the menu screen is
displayed.
zz To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
65
Menu Operations and Settings
zz With [j: Menu display] set to [Standard]
(1)
the menu screen.
1zDisplay
z Press the <M> button to display the
menu screen.
a tab.
2zSelect
z Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
main tab (1) and secondary tab.
zz You can also select by turning the
<6> dial.
zz After this, operations are the same as
when [j: Menu display] is set to
[Guided]. See “Menu Setting Procedure”
(=64), starting with step 5.
zz To exit the setting, press the
<M> button.
66
Menu Operations and Settings
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set.
The menu item is dimmed if another
function setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will become
settable.
zz You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
zz [Basic settings] in [5: Reset camera] enables you to restore menu functions
to default settings (=453).
67
Touch-Screen Operation
You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touchscreen panel) with your finger.
Tap
Sample screen (Quick Control)
zz Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly
and then remove your finger from) the
screen.
zz For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears.
By tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Drag
Sample screen (Menu screen)
zz Slide your finger while touching the
screen.
zz If [5: Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch operations
(=446).
zz Touch control responsiveness can be adjusted (=444).
68
Quick Control
You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is
called Quick Control (except in [A] mode).
1Press the <Q> button (7).
a setting item.
2zSelect
z Press the <W> <X> keys for selection.
zz When the screen at left is displayed,
press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys for
selection.
an option.
3zSelect
z Turn the <6> dial, or press the <Y>
<Z> keys to change the setting.
Some items are set by pressing a button
after this.
zz Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
zz You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (=68).
69
70
Basic Shooting Modes
This chapter describes effective shooting techniques in [A], [D],
Special scene (=80), and Creative filters (=96) modes.
Simply compose your shot and press the shutter button, and all
settings are set automatically.
71
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto
(Fully Automatic)
[A] [D] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can adjust focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of
the subject.
With [D], you can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still
photos. The camera records 2–4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie (=190, =268).
the shooting mode switch
1Set
to <A>.
zz To use [D] mode, after setting the
shooting mode switch to <z>, tap the
upper left of the screen and press the
<Y> <Z> keys to select [D] mode,
then press <0>.
the camera at what you will
2Aim
shoot (the subject).
zz A frame may be displayed around the
subject, under some shooting conditions.
zz AF points are displayed over any faces
detected.
72
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
on the subject.
3zFocus
z Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
zz If [D] blinks, use the <D> lever to raise
the flash.
zz You can also focus by tapping a person’s
face or another subject on the screen
(Touch AF).
zz Under low light, the AF-assist beam
(=184) is automatically activated if
needed.
zz For stationary subjects, the AF point is
displayed in green when the subject is
in focus. The camera beeps at this time
(<A> mode only). (One-Shot AF)
zz For moving subjects, the AF point is
displayed in blue (<A> mode only) and
tracks subject movement. The camera
does not beep. (Servo AF)
the picture.
4zTake
z Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
zz The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
zz To retract the flash, push it down with
your fingers.
zz Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
73
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
zz AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press
the shutter button halfway. Even when automatically set to One-Shot AF, the
camera will switch to Servo AF if subject motion is detected while you are
pressing the shutter button halfway (<A> mode only).
zz The [A] mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you prefer other colors, switch to an advanced shooting
mode (=38) and select a Picture Style other than [D], then shoot again
(=154).
D: Hybrid Auto
zz For more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
zz Battery life is shorter in this mode than in <A> mode, because digest movies
are recorded for each shot.
zz A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still photo immediately after
turning the camera on, choosing <D> mode, or operating the camera in other
ways.
zz Any sounds and vibrations from your camera or lens operations will be
recorded in digest movies.
zz Digest movie image quality is w6W for NTSC or w5W for PAL.
This varies depending on the video system setting.
zz Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the
self-timer.
zz Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if
they were recorded on the same day in <D> mode.
yyThe digest movie recording time reaches approx. 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
(May also be saved as separate files if the size exceeds approx. 4 GB.)
yyThe digest movie is protected.
yyDaylight saving time, video system, or time zone settings are changed.
zz Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
74
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Minimizing Blurred Photos
zz Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
zz Using a wireless remote control (sold separately, =191) is
recommended.
FAQ
zz Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the camera at an area with good contrast, then press the shutter
button halfway (=57). If you are too close to the subject, move away
and shoot again.
zz Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions
are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can
take the picture.
zz Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF>, set it to <AF>.
zz The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due
to camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
75
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the
focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button
pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject (<A> mode only)
After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the
camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the
subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
76
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Scene Icons
The camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the
scene. The detected scene type is indicated
on the upper left of the screen. For icon
details, see =505.
Adjusting Settings by Touching the Screen
By tapping icons on the screen, you can
adjust settings.
77
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Shooting with Effects Applied (Creative Assist)
the <Q> button.
1zPress
z Read the message and select [OK].
an effect.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
effect, then press <0>.
the effect level and other
3Select
details.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to set it, then
press <0>.
zz To reset the setting, press the <A>
button, then select [OK].
Creative Assist Effects
zz [
] Preset
zz [
] Background blur
Select one of the preset effects.
Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not
available with [B&W].
Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds
sharper, or lower values to make them blurrier. [Auto] adjusts
background blurring to match the brightness. Depending on lens
brightness (f/number), some positions may not be available.
78
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
zz [
] Brightness
zz [
] Contrast
zz [
] Saturation
Adjust image brightness.
Adjust contrast.
Adjust the vividness of colors.
zz [
] Color tone 1
zz [
] Color tone 2
zz [
] Monochrome
Adjust amber/blue color tone.
Adjust green/magenta color tone.
Set the toning effect for monochrome shooting. Set to [Off] to shoot in
color. [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available
with options other than [Off].
zz [Background blur] is not available when the flash is used.
zz These settings are reset when you switch modes or turn the camera off.
To save the settings, set [z: Retain Creative Assist data] to [Enable].
Saving Effects
To save the current setting to the camera, tap [Register] on the Creative
Assist setting screen. Up to three presets can be saved as [USER*].
After three have been saved, an existing [USER*] preset must be
overwritten to save a new one.
79
Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you
select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
the shooting mode switch
1Set
to <z>.
2Tap the shooting mode icon.
a shooting mode.
3zSelect
z Choose from [J], [2], [K], [3], [5],
[4], [P], [6], [F], [G], or [I].
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
shooting mode, then press <0>.
zz You can also select by turning the
<6> dial.
zz Cautions on each shooting mode are listed together (=93). Read the
cautions before shooting.
zz You can also set the shooting mode in [z: Shooting mode].
zz Take some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.
80
Special Scene Mode
Special Scene Mode
J
Shooting Mode
Page
Self Portrait
=82
P
Shooting Mode
Page
Food
=88
2
Portrait
=83
6
Night Portrait
=89
K
Smooth skin
=84
F
Handheld Night Scene
=90
3 Landscape
=85
G
HDR Backlight Control
=91
5 Sports
=86
I
Silent Mode
=92
4
Close-up
=87
81
Self Portrait Mode
To take shots of yourself, use [J] (Self Portrait) mode. Rotate the screen
around toward the lens. Customizable image processing includes skin
smoothing as well as brightness and background adjustment to make
yourself stand out.
Shooting Tips
zz Set the brightness and smooth skin effect.
[Brightness] and [Smooth skin effect] can be set in a range of five
levels. In [Background], you can adjust the level of background blurring.
zz Tap on the screen to shoot.
Besides pressing the shutter button completely to shoot, you can also
shoot by tapping the screen, once you enable Touch Shutter by tapping
[y] to change it to [x].
zz You can also take shots of yourself in shooting modes other than [J] (except
[I] mode) by rotating the screen toward the front and tapping [J] in the
lower left.
82
Portrait Mode
The [2] (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject
stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
zz Select the location where the distance between the subject
and the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the more
blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better
against an uncluttered dark background.
zz Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the
subject from the waist up.
zz Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [z: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
zz Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [i] (Continuous shooting). If you keep holding
down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture changes
in the subject’s facial expression and pose.
83
Smooth Skin Mode
Use [K] (Smooth skin) mode to make skin look more attractive.
Image processing makes skin look smoother.
Shooting Tips
zz Enable the camera to detect faces.
Frames are displayed around any main subjects detected for skin
smoothing. For more effective skin smoothing, you can move closer to or
farther from the subject so that the frame is displayed on the subject’s face.
zz Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [z: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
84
Landscape Mode
Use the [3] (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very
sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
zz With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the
objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.
zz Keep the camera steady when shooting night scenes.
Shooting with [3] while handholding the camera may cause camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
85
Sports Mode
Use the [5] (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running
person or a moving vehicle.
(1)
Shooting Tips
zz Use a telephoto lens.
Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a
distance.
zz Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
By default, [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking]. An Area AF frame
(1) appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject
is in focus, the AF point turns blue.
zz Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [i] (Continuous shooting). At the decisive
moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot. To track
the subject and capture changes as it moves, keep holding down the
shutter button to shoot continuously.
86
Close-up Mode
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the [4]
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro
lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
zz Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
zz Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on the
top of the camera to the subject. Focusing is not possible if you are too
close.
zz With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject
look larger.
87
Food Mode
When you want to take pictures of food, use [P] (Food). The photo will look
bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge
will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
zz Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge, set it
toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
88
Night Portrait Mode
When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking
night scene in the background, use the [6] (Night Portrait) mode. Note that
a flash is required for shooting. Using a tripod is recommended.
Shooting Tips
zz Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night
view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with handheld shooting,
use a tripod.
zz Check the image brightness.
It is recommended to play back the captured image on location to check
the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and shoot
again.
zz Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with
[A] is recommended.
zz If you use the self-timer together with a flash, the self-timer lamp will light up
briefly after the picture is taken.
89
Handheld Night Scene Mode
The [F] (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes
even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are
taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting image with reduced
camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
zz Hold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode, four
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the final image.
90
HDR Backlight Control Mode
When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the [G]
(HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode,
three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This results in one
image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped shadows
caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Shooting Tips
zz Hold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode, three
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the final image.
91
Silent Mode
Where silence is needed, you can shoot without beeps or shutter release
sounds. As you shoot, a white frame is momentarily displayed around the
screen.
Shooting Tips
zz Take some test shots.
Consider taking some test shots in advance, because lens aperture and
focusing adjustment may be audible under some shooting conditions.
92
Special Scene Mode Precautions
J: Self Portrait
zz Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on the shooting
conditions.
zz [Smooth skin effect] settings specified in [J] mode are not applied in [K]
mode.
zz [Background] is set to [Auto] and cannot be changed in [I] flash mode when
you have raised the flash.
K: Smooth skin
zz Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on the shooting
conditions.
zz Setting details in [K] mode are not applied in [J] mode.
3: Landscape
zz Flash photography is not possible.
5: Sports
zz Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in
the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
zz Flash photography is not possible.
P: Food
zz The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
zz When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
zz If you use a flash, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.
zz If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced properly.
6: Night Portrait
zz Tell subjects to remain still for a moment after the flash fires.
zz Focusing may be difficult when subject faces look dark. In this case, focus
manually by setting [z: Focus mode] to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode
switch to <MF> (=55, =182).
zz Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be difficult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, focus manually by setting [z: Focus mode]
to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> (=55, =182).
zz Shots will look slightly different from the image as displayed on the screen.
93
Special Scene Mode Precautions
6: Night Portrait (continued)
zz When there is a risk of overexposure in flash photography, shutter speed or
ISO speed is automatically adjusted to reduce loss of detail in highlights and
shoot at standard exposure. In flash shots with certain lenses, shutter speeds
and ISO speeds displayed when you press the shutter button halfway may not
match the actual settings used. This may alter the brightness of backgrounds
that are out of flash range.
F: Handheld Night Scene
zz Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
zz RAW image quality cannot be set.
zz Flash photography is not possible.
zz Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be difficult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, focus manually by setting [z: Focus mode]
to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> (=55, =182).
zz Shots will look slightly different from the image as displayed on the screen.
zz If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
zz The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
zz It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is finished.
94
Special Scene Mode Precautions
G: HDR Backlight Control
zz Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
zz RAW image quality cannot be set.
zz Flash photography is not possible.
zz Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may
look irregular or have significant noise.
zz HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit scenes or
extremely high-contrast scenes.
zz When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright as they are, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR effect.
zz If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
zz The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
zz It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is finished.
I: Silent Mode
zz Be responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy and
portrait rights.
zz Images of fast-moving subjects may look distorted.
zz Continuous shooting and flash photography are not available.
95
Creative Filters Mode
You can shoot with filter effects applied. You can preview filter effects before
shooting.
the shooting mode switch
1Set
to <z>.
2Tap the shooting mode icon.
a filter effect (shooting
3Select
mode).
zz Choose from [I], [G], [X], [K], [H],
[c], [A], [B], [C], or [D].
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
shooting mode, then press <0>.
zz You can also select by turning the
<6> dial.
zz The image is shown with the filter effect
applied.
the effect and shoot.
4zAdjust
z Press the <Q> button and select an
item in the upper left. (Not available for
[c], [A], [B], [C], or [D].)
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the
effect, then press <0>.
96
Creative Filters Mode
zz RAW and RAW+JPEG are not available. When RAW image quality is set,
images are captured with 73 image quality. When RAW+JPEG image quality
is set, images are captured with the specified JPEG image quality.
zz Continuous shooting is not available when [I], [G], [X], [K], [H], or [c]
is set.
zz With [I], the grainy preview will differ somewhat from the appearance of your
shots.
zz With [G] or [c] options, the soft focus preview may differ somewhat from the
appearance of your shots.
zz No histogram is displayed.
zz A magnified view is not available.
zz In advanced shooting modes, these settings are available from the Quick
Control screen: [I], [G], [X], [J], [K], [H], and [c].
zz Take some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.
97
Creative Filters Mode
Creative Filter Characteristics
zz I Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white effect.
zz G Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
zz X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this filter effect magnifies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the filter
effect while checking the resulting image. One AF point is used, fixed at
the center.
zz K Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors.
By adjusting the effect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
zz H Toy camera effect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
98
Creative Filters Mode
zz c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect.
Shooting under the default setting will keep the center looking sharp.
You can move the area that looks sharp (the scene frame) as described
in “Miniature Effect Operations” (=101). 1-point AF is used as the
AF method. Shooting with the AF point and scene frame aligned is
recommended.
zz A HDR art standard
Photos retain more detail in highlights and shadows. With reduced
contrast and flatter gradation, the finish resembles a painting. The subject
outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
zz B HDR art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [HDR art standard], and the
low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
zz C HDR art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the
picture looks like an oil painting.
zz D HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to
make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and old. The subject
outlines will have intensely bright (or dark) edges.
zz With [A], [B], [C], and [D], you can shoot high dynamic range
photos that retain detail in highlights and shadows of high-contrast scenes.
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightnesses each time you
shoot and used to create a single image. See the cautions on =100.
99
Creative Filters Mode
[A], [B], [C], and [D] Notes
zz Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
zz Filter effect previews will not look exactly the same as your shots.
zz If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
zz The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
zz Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots.
zz The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.
Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
zz Shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
zz It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is finished.
zz Flash photography is not possible.
100
Creative Filters Mode
Miniature Effect Operations
the scene frame.
1zMove
z Use the scene frame to set an area that
will look sharp.
zz To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <B>
button or tap [r] in the lower right of the
screen.
zz To switch between vertical and horizontal
scene frame orientation, tap [T] in the
lower left of the screen.
zz To move a horizontal scene frame,
press the <W> <X> keys, and to
move a vertical scene frame, press the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz To return the scene frame to the center
of the screen, tap [e] in the lower left
of the screen.
zz Press <0> to confirm the position of
the scene frame. Next, set the AF point.
the AF point.
2zMove
z The AF point turns orange and can
be moved.
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on.
zz Aligning the AF point and scene frame is
recommended.
zz To return the AF point to the center of
the screen, tap [e] in the lower left of
the screen.
zz Press <0> to confirm the position of
the AF point.
101
Creative Filters Mode
3Take the picture.
zz You can switch the scene frame orientation in step 1 with the <Y> <Z>
keys when in horizontal orientation or the <W> <X> keys when in vertical
orientation.
102
Advanced Shooting
Modes
Advanced shooting modes ([d], [s],
[f], and [a]) give you the freedom to
shoot in a variety of ways by setting your
preferred shutter speed, aperture value,
exposure, and more.
zz To clear the description displayed after shooting mode
selection, press <0> (=38).
103
Program AE Mode (P)
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the
subject’s brightness.
* “d” stands for Program.
* “AE” stands for Auto Exposure.
1Set the shooting mode to [d].
on the subject.
2zFocus
z Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
the display and shoot.
3zCheck
z As long as the exposure value is not
blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
zz If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates
underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
zz If the “1/4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates
overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to
reduce the amount of light entering the lens.
104
Program AE Mode (P)
Differences Between [d] and [A] Modes
zz In [A] mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode,
are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set are
limited. On the other hand, with [d] mode, only the shutter speed and aperture
are set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering mode, and
other functions.
Program Shift
zz To adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value while
maintaining the same exposure, press the shutter button halfway and turn the
<6> dial. This is called Program shift.
zz Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns off).
zz Program shift cannot be used with flash.
105
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the
subject. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject.
A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* “s” stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1Set the shooting mode to [s].
the desired shutter speed.
2zSetz Turn
the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3zFocus
z Press the shutter button halfway.
the display and shoot.
4zCheck
z As long as the aperture value is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
106
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
zz If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to
set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a higher
ISO speed.
zz If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6> dial to
set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a lower
ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
zz For example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
107
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject
brightness. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the
foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand,
a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* “f” stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
Sharp foreground and background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6) (With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1Set the shooting mode to [f].
the desired aperture.
2zSetz Turn
the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3zFocus
z Press the shutter button halfway.
the display and shoot.
4zCheck
z As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
108
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
zz If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6>
dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking
stops or set a higher ISO speed.
zz If the “1/4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6>
dial to set a smaller aperture (higher f/number) until the shutter speed blinking
stops or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
zz The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/number
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera,
“F00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Checking the Area in FocusM
By assigning the movie shooting button to [1: Depth-of-field preview] (using
[zMovie shooting button function] in [5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)]
(=460)), you can press the movie shooting button to stop down the lens
to the current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).
zz The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground
to the background.
zz The resulting depth-of-field is apparent as you change the aperture value while
holding down the depth-of-field preview button.
zz Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to depthof-field preview.
109
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.
To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a
commercially available exposure meter.
* “a” stands for Manual.
1Set the shooting mode to [a].
the ISO speed (=138).
2zSetz With
ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (=111).
the desired shutter speed.
3zSetz Turn
the <6> dial to set it.
the aperture value.
4zSetz Press
the <W> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <6> dial to set a
value.
on the subject.
5zFocus
z Press the shutter button halfway.
zz Check the exposure level mark [N] to
see how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
(2) (1)
110
(1)
(2)
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
the exposure and take the
6Set
picture.
zz Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture value.
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can
set exposure compensation (=137) as follows:
zz Touch the exposure level indicator
zz [z: Exposure comp.]
zz If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may
not obtain the desired exposure effect. In this case, set the exposure
compensation.
zz With evaluative metering, holding down the shutter button halfway locks the
ISO speed once the subject is in focus with One-Shot AF.
zz When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
zz To compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed the
<A> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <A> button,
recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.
111
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter
button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use
bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1Set the shooting mode to [a].
the shutter speed to [BULB].
2zSetz Turn
the <6> dial to the left to set
[BULB].
the aperture value.
3zSetz Press
the <W> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <6> dial to set a
value.
the picture.
4zTake
z The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button pressed
completely.
zz The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the screen.
112
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
zz Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
zz Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
zz If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (=494).
zz With [z: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated
during long exposures (=162).
zz To reduce camera shake, consider using a tripod and optional Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1.
113
114
Shooting Settings
This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on
the [z: Shooting settings] tab.
115
Still Photo Shooting
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available
only in advanced shooting modes ([d], [s], [f], or [a]).
116
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zz Shooting settings 1
=103
=122
=125
=127
=128
=248
zz Shooting settings 2
=133
=137
=138
=236
=141
=142
zz Shooting settings 3
=143
=145
=146
117
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zz Shooting settings 4
=147
=150
=152
=153
=154, 157, 160
zz Shooting settings 5
=162
=163
=165
zz Shooting settings 6
=167
=170
=180
=181
=182
118
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zz Shooting settings 7
=183
=184
=187
=188
zz Shooting settings 8
=205
=213
=231
=239
119
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
The following screens are displayed in [A], [D], Special scene, and
Creative filters modes.
zz Shooting settings 1
=72, 80, 96
=122
=125
=127
=248
=133
zz Shooting settings 2
=78
=190
=165
zz Shooting settings 3
=170
=180
=181
=182
120
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zz Shooting settings 4
=184
=187
=188
zz Shooting settings 5
=205
=213
=231
zz Available setting items vary depending on shooting mode.
zz [Retain Creative Assist data] is available in [A] mode.
zz [Digest type] is available in [D] mode.
121
Image Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality.
1Select [z: Image quality].
quality.
2zSetz Totheselectimage
the RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial, and to select the JPEG
quality, press the <Y> <Z> keys.
zz Press <0> to set it.
zz Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting
screen always applies to a setting of [3:2], regardless of the actual aspect ratio
setting (=125).
zz If [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.
zz If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be
recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the
same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
zz b is in 7 (Fine) quality.
zz Meaning of image quality icons: 1 RAW, F Compact RAW, JPEG,
7 Fine, 8 Normal, 3 Large, 4 Medium, 6 Small.
122
Image Quality
RAW Images
RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the
card digitally as 1 or F (smaller than 1) files, depending on your
selection.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW
images. You can make various adjustments to images depending upon how
they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of images reflecting
the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
zz To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
zz Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer,
obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon website to update it
(=472). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or
earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.
zz Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images
taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software
manufacturer.
Guide to Image Quality Settings
For guidelines on file sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst
shots, see =495.
123
Image Quality
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The estimated maximum burst is shown on
the top of the shooting screen.
zz If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98
or less. [BUSY] display indicates that internal memory is full and shooting
will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will
increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume
continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on
=495.
124
Still Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the image’s aspect ratio.
1Select [z: Still img aspect ratio].
the aspect ratio.
2zSetz Select
an aspect ratio, then
press <0>.
zz JPEG images
The images will be recorded with the set aspect ratio.
zz RAW images
The images will always be recorded in the [3:2] aspect ratio.
The selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.
When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same
aspect ratio set for shooting.
125
Still Image Aspect Ratio
Aspect Ratio
4:3
16:9
1:1
zz When you play back RAW images shot in the [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] aspect ratio,
they will be displayed with lines indicating the respective aspect ratio.
(These lines are not recorded in the image.)
126
Image Review Time
You can change how long images are displayed after shots. Set to [Hold]
to keep shots displayed immediately after you shoot, or set to [Off] if you
prefer not to have shots displayed.
1Select [z: Image review].
2Set a time option.
zz When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [5: Power
saving].
127
Lens Aberration Correction
M
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical
characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using
[Lens aberration correction].
[z: Lens aberration
1Select
correction].
2Select an item.
[Enable].
3zSelect
z Confirm that the name of the attached
lens and (except for diffraction
correction) [Correction data available]
are displayed.
zz If [Correction data not available]
or [ ] is displayed, see “Digital Lens
Optimizer” (=130).
128
Lens Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
zz Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
zz The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
zz The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
zz Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in [A], [D], Special scene,
and Creative filters modes when correction data is registered on the camera.
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
zz To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the
area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
zz Setting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
zz When you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images
displayed.
zz Distortion correction is not applied in movie recording.
zz Playback of images with distortion correction applied may show the AF point
out of position, relative to the time of shooting.
129
Lens Aberration Correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along
with diffraction and low-pass filter-induced loss of clarity.
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed by [Digital Lens
Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the
camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
zz Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before
shooting.
zz The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
zz For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is
not possible.)
zz Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diffraction, although these options are not displayed.
zz Digital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in [A], [D], Special scene,
and Creative filters modes when correction data is registered on the camera.
130
Lens Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
zz [Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer]
is enabled.
Diffraction Correction
Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
zz Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
zz The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
zz For movie recording, [Diffraction correction] will not appear.
zz With “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter, etc.
is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is effective even at
an aperture close to the open aperture.
zz [Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer]
is enabled.
131
Lens Aberration Correction
General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction
zz Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already
taken.
zz When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
zz Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will
not be recorded.
zz The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the lens
used does not have distance information.
General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction
zz The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
zz If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
zz Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is
attached.
zz If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the
result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for
diffraction correction).
zz If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
132
Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive
mode suiting the scene or subject.
1Select [z: Drive mode].
2Set the drive mode.
zz [u] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be
taken.
zz [i] Continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at up to approx. 6.1 shots/sec. in One-Shot AF mode or
4.0 shots/sec. in Servo AF mode.
133
Drive Mode
zz [m/Q] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
zz [l] Self-timer: 2 sec.
zz [q] Self-timer: Continuous shooting
For self-timer shooting, see =135. For remote control shooting,
see =191.
zz Conditions for maximum continuous shooting speed (=133) are as follows:
shooting with a fully charged battery at a 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed
and maximum aperture (which varies by lens) at room temperature (23°C/73°F).
zz The maximum continuous shooting speed may be slower depending on factors
such as the battery level, temperature, shutter speed, aperture value, subject
conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting
settings.
zz With Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
depending on subject conditions or the lens used.
zz When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily disabled
(=124).
134
Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
1Select [z: Drive mode].
the self-timer.
2zSelect
z m (Q): Shoot in 10 sec.
l: Shoot in 2 sec.
q: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for
the specified number of shots*
* Press the <W> <X> keys to set the number
of continuous shots (2–10).
zz The [Q] icon is displayed when the
camera is paired with a wireless remote
control (sold separately, =191).
the picture.
3zTake
z Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
zz To check operation, look at the self-timer
lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the
countdown in seconds on the screen.
zz Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and
the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.
before the picture is taken.
135
Self-Timer
zz With [q], the shooting interval may become longer under some shooting
conditions, such as image quality, use of flash, and other factors.
zz [I] enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod.
This prevents camera shake if you shoot still-life or long exposures.
zz After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (=256) to check focus
and exposure is recommended.
zz When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (=76) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
zz To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press <0>.
zz Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
136
Exposure Compensation
M
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the [d], [s], [f], and [a]
shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in
1/3‑stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation when [a] mode and ISO Auto are
both set, see =111.
the exposure level indicator.
1zSelect
z Press the <W> key and select the
exposure level indicator.
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
the compensation amount.
2zSetz Watch
the screen and set by turning the
<6> dial.
zz A [O] icon is displayed to indicate
exposure compensation.
the picture.
3zTake
z To cancel exposure compensation, set
the exposure level indicator [N] to the
standard exposure index ([C]).
zz If [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=141) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
zz The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you turn off
the camera.
zz You can also set with [z: Exposure comp.].
137
ISO Speed Settings
M
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient
light level. ISO speed is set automatically in [A], [D], Special scene, and
Creative filters modes.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie recording, see =499.
ISO Speed
1Tap the ISO speed icon.
the ISO speed.
2zSetz Press
the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
ISO speed.
zz ISO speed can be set within ISO
100–25600 in 1/3-stop increments.
zz Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically.
138
ISO Speed Settings
ISO Speed Guide
zz Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of
camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of
field), in some shooting conditions.
zz High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper
depth of field), and longer flash range but may increase image noise.
zz Can also be set in [ISO speed] in [z ISO speed settings].
zz Under [5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [ISO expansion] is set to [1:On],
“H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) can also be selected (=459).
zz Image noise (such as dots of light or banding) may increase and apparent
resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 51200), because this is an
expanded ISO speed.
zz If [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (=142),
ISO 100/125/160 and H (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be selected.
zz When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, or long exposure,
image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or color
shift may become noticeable.
zz When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as
a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images
may not be recorded properly.
zz If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure
may result.
139
ISO Speed Settings
Max for Auto
The maximum ISO speed for the ISO Auto range can be set between ISO
400 and ISO 25600.
1Select [zISO speed settings].
2Select [Max for Auto].
the maximum ISO speed.
3zSetz Select
the ISO speed, then
press <0>.
140
Auto Lighting Optimizer
M
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or
contrast is too low or high.
[z: Auto Lighting
1Select
Optimizer].
2Set a correction option.
zz Noise may increase and clarity may change, under some shooting conditions.
zz If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
zz If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or
flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come
out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
zz Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes
longer.
zz In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the checkmark [X] for
[Disable during man expo] setting, [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also
be set even in [a] mode.
141
Highlight Tone Priority
M
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1Select [z: Highlight tone priority].
an option.
2zSetz [Enable]:
Improves gradation in
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes smoother.
zz [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed
highlights even more than [Enable],
under some shooting conditions.
zz Noise may increase slightly.
zz The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot
be set.
zz [Enhanced] is not available when recording movies.
zz With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
142
Metering Mode
M
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
Evaluative metering is set automatically in [A], [D], Special scene, and
Creative filters modes (except [X]).
1Select [z: Metering mode].
2Set the metering mode.
zz [q] Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects.
The camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.
zz [w] Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due
to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 5.8% of the area at the center of the
screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.
zz [r] Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject or scene.
Covers approx. 2.9% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot
metering area is indicated on the screen.
zz [e] Center-weighted average metering
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the
screen weighted more heavily.
143
Metering Mode
zz By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With [q], holding
down the shutter button halfway will lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after
focus is achieved with One-Shot AF. In the [w], [r], and [e] modes, the
exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button
halfway does not lock the exposure.)
144
Metering Timer
M
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the
duration of exposure display) after it is triggered by an action such as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
1Select [z: Metering timer].
2Set a time option.
145
Exposure Simulation
M
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure)
of the actual image will look.
1Select [z: Expo. simulation].
2Set an option.
zz Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation,
the image brightness will change accordingly.
zz Disable (E)
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see.
Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the
standard brightness.
146
White Balance
M
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the
Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain
the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with
Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it
manually by shooting a white object.
1Select [z: White balance].
2Select an item.
(Approx.)
Display
Q
Qw
Mode
Auto (Ambience priority, =149)
Auto (White priority, =149)
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
3000–7000
W
Daylight
E
Shade
5200
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash
4000
Automatically set*
O
Custom (=150)
2000–10000
P
Color temperature (=151)
2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000K.
147
White Balance
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided
depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color
is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. With this
function, you can take the pictures with natural color tones.
148
White Balance
[Q] Auto White Balance
With [Q], you can slightly increase the intensity of the image’s warm color
cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [Qw], you can
reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color cast.
1Select [z: White balance].
[Q].
2zSelect
z With [Q] selected, press the <B>
button.
3Select an item.
Cautions for Setting [Qw]
zz The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
zz When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
zz When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q].
149
White Balance
[O] Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this
procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
a white object.
1zShoot
z Aim the camera at a plain white object,
so that white fills the screen.
zz Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
zz You can use any of the white balance
settings.
2Select [z: Custom White Balance].
the white balance data.
3zImport
z Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image captured in step 1, then
press <0>.
Select [OK] to import the data.
4Select [z: White balance].
the custom white balance.
5zSelect
z Select [O].
150
White Balance
zz If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure,
a correct white balance may not be obtained.
zz These images cannot be selected: Images captured with Picture Style set to
[Monochrome], images with a Creative filter applied before or after shooting,
cropped images, or images shot with another camera.
zz Images that cannot be used in the setting may be displayed.
zz Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard
18% gray reflector (commercially-available).
[P] Color Temperature
1Select [z: White balance].
the color temperature.
2zSetz Select
[P].
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the desired
color temperature, then press <0>.
zz The color temperature can be set from
approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K
increments.
zz When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
zz If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the
difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the camera’s
color temperature reading.
151
White Balance Correction
M
White balance correction has the same effect as using a commercially
available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter.
1Select [z: WB correction].
the white balance correction.
2zSetz Press
the <V> cross keys to move the
Sample setting: A2, G1
[■] mark to your preferred position.
zz B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward the
color in the direction of the move.
On the right of the screen, [Shift]
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
zz To clear all [WB correction] settings,
tap [Clear all].
zz Press <0> to exit the setting.
zz One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature
conversion filter.)
152
Color Space
M
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. For normal
shooting, sRGB is recommended.
1Select [z: Color space].
2Set a color space option.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial
uses. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible
monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
zz If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character in the
file name will be an underscore “_”.
zz The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
zz [sRGB] is set automatically in [A], [D], Special scene, and Creative filters
modes.
153
Picture Style Selection
M
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.
1Select [z: Picture Style].
2Select a Picture Style.
Picture Style Characteristics
zz [D] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors
will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature,
outdoor and sunset scenes.
zz If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
zz [P] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
zz [Q] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (=158), you can adjust the skin tone.
154
Picture Style Selection
zz [R] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for
impressive landscapes.
zz [u] Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
zz [S] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
zz [U] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject
that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be
adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images
with modest brightness and color saturation.
zz [V] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
zz Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
zz [W] User Defined 1–3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture
Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (=160). With any of the User
Defined Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will be taken with
the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Auto].
155
Picture Style Selection
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings.
The numbers indicate the values for these settings specified for the
respective Picture Style.
Sharpness
g
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
zz During movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]
and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
156
Picture Style Customization
M
You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings.
To customize [Monochrome], see =159.
1Select [z: Picture Style].
a Picture Style.
2zSelect
z Select the Picture Style to adjust, then
tap [Detail set.].
a setting item.
3zSelect
z See “Settings and Effects” (=158) for
details on the settings and effects.
effect level.
4zSetz Setthea value,
then press <0>.
zz Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
zz Any settings you change from default
values are displayed in blue.
157
Picture Style Customization
Settings and Effects
Sharpness
A Strength
0: Weak outline emphasis
7: Strong outline emphasis
1
B Fineness*
1: Fine
5: Grainy
2
C Threshold*
1: Low
5: High
h Contrast
–4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
–4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
–4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
g
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,
the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more
the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low. However, noise
tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
zz For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be
set (not displayed).
zz By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter settings of
the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
zz To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture
Style, then shoot.
158
Picture Style Customization
[V] Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or
[Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set
[Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
[k] Filter effect
Filter
With a filter effect applied to a monochrome
image, you can make white clouds or green
trees stand out more.
Sample Effects
N:
None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye:
Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or:
Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R:
Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G:
Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
zz Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
[l] Toning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can create
a monochrome image in the selected color.
Effective when you want to create more
impressive images.
159
Picture Style Registration
M
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2],
or [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with different
settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility
(EOS software) can also be modified here.
1Select [z: Picture Style].
[User Def.].
2zSelect
z Select [User Def. *], then tap
[Detail set.].
<0>.
3zPress
z With [Picture Style] selected,
press <0>.
the base Picture Style.
4zSelect
z Select the base Picture Style.
zz Also select styles this way when
adjusting styles registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software).
160
Picture Style Registration
5Select an item.
effect level.
6zSetz Forthedetails,
see “Picture Style
Customization” (=157).
zz Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated
on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names indicate that you
have changed the settings from default
values.
zz If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered
User Defined Picture Style.
zz Selecting [Basic settings] in [5: Reset camera] (=453) will restore all
[User Def. *] settings to defaults.
zz To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
zz Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
161
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
M
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding)
typical of long exposures can be reduced.
[z: Long exp. noise
1Select
reduction].
2Set a reduction option.
zz [AUTO] Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]
setting is effective enough in most cases.
zz [ON] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the
[Auto] setting.
zz With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
zz Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or
[Auto] setting.
zz [BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not
displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
162
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
M
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is
especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at
low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas)
can further be reduced.
1Select [z: High ISO speed NR].
2Set the level.
zz [M] Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and
merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
163
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
zz If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise
reduction effect may become smaller.
zz If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
Using a tripod is recommended.
zz If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
zz Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
zz If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
zz After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is displayed as
images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
zz [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting
RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with features such as long exposure noise
reduction or Creative filters.
zz Flash photography is not possible.
zz [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
zz The camera automatically switches to [Standard] if you turn it off, replace the
battery or card, switch to [A], [D], Special scene, or Creative filters mode,
or switch to movie recording.
164
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically.
the Touch Shutter.
1zEnable
z Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom right.
zz Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
zz [x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
zz [y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
to shoot.
2zTapz Tapononthethescreen
face or subject on the screen.
zz On the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (=170).
zz When [x] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then the
picture is taken automatically.
zz If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot be
taken. Tap on the face or subject on the
screen again.
165
Touch Shutter
zz Even if you set the drive mode to [i], the camera will still shoot in the single
shooting mode.
zz Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on
the image with [One-Shot AF].
zz Tapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
zz If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z: Image review] set to [Hold],
you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
zz To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb exposure.
Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.
166
AF Operation
M
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1Select [z: AF operation].
2Select a setting item.
zz If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs,
the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that
Make Focusing Difficult” (=179).
167
AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)
This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter
button halfway, the camera will focus only once.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper
will sound.
zz The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see =133.
zz If [5: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down
the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject
continuously.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
zz The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see =133.
zz Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s
speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
zz Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first,
then recompose and shoot.
zz The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
168
AF Operation
AF-Assist Beam
The AF-assist beam (=36) may fire when you press the shutter button
halfway under low light or in similar conditions, to make autofocusing easier.
zz The AF-assist beam does not fire when [z: AF operation] is set to [Servo AF].
zz The AF-assist beam does not fire when Touch AF is used (when [z: Touch
Shutter] is set to [Disable]).
169
AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
The camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone
AF frame. In [A], [D] or [J] mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.
For instructions on selecting an AF method, see =172.
: Face+Tracking
The camera detects and focuses on
people’s faces. [p] (an AF point) appears
over any face detected, which is then
tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
With Servo AF, focusing continues as long as subjects can be tracked within
the Area AF frame as you shoot.
: Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area
than 1-point AF.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF
point [S].
170
AF Method
: Zone AF
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames
to cover a large area, which makes
focusing easier than with 1-point AF.
Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone
AF frame are also given priority in focusing.
AF points in focus are displayed with [S].
171
AF Method
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see =185.
1Select [z: AF method].
2Select a setting item.
zz The descriptions on =173–=175 assume that the AF operation is set to
[One-Shot AF] (=168). With [Servo AF] (=168) set, the AF point will turn
blue when focus is achieved.
zz Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation),
see =165.
172
AF Method
zz u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves,
the AF point [p] also moves to track the face.
the AF point.
1zCheck
z [p] (an AF point) appears over any face
detected.
on the subject.
2zFocus
z Once you press the shutter button
halfway and the subject is in focus, the
AF point turns green and the camera
beeps.
zz An orange AF point indicates that the
camera could not focus on subjects.
3Take the picture.
173
AF Method
Tapping a Face for Focus
Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to [ ] and
focuses where you tap.
Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point [ ] moves to
track it.
zz If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (=185) so that the face can be detected,
then perform AF.
zz An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
zz Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture,
too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
zz AF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to
the center.
zz The [p] may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
zz The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
174
AF Method
zz Spot AF/1-point AF/Zone AF
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF
screens are used as an example.
the AF point.
1zCheck
z The AF point (1) will appear.
With Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is
displayed.
(1)
the AF point.
2zMove
z To move the AF point, tap where you
want to focus.
zz To return the AF point or Zone AF frame
to the center of the screen, tap [e].
zz For magnified display, tap [u]. Each
tap of [u] changes the magnification
ratio.
on the subject.
3zFocus
z Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will
turn green and the beeper will sound.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will
turn orange.
4Take the picture.
175
AF Method
zz The camera will keep moving the active AF point [S] to track subjects for
Zone AF when Servo AF operation is used, but under some shooting conditions
(such as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
zz Focusing with an AF-assist beam may be difficult with AF points near the edge
of the screen. In this case, move to an AF point in the center of the screen.
176
AF Method
Magnified View
You can check the focus by tapping [u] to magnify display by approx. 5×
or 10×. Magnified view is not possible with [u+Tracking].
zz Magnification is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF] or [1-point AF]
and on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF].
zz Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the shutter
button halfway when set to [Spot AF] and [1-point AF]. When set to
[Zone AF], autofocusing is performed after restoring normal display.
zz With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnified
view, the camera will return to the normal view for focusing.
zz If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
zz If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
zz AF speed differs between the normal view and magnified view.
zz Continuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is magnified.
zz With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
177
AF Method
AF Shooting Tips
zz Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will
focus again.
zz Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
zz Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to
focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
zz If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and
focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume
shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
zz If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (=185).
zz For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus,
try centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them
into focus, then recompose the shot before shooting.
zz With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
178
AF Method
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
zz Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or
when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
zz Subjects in low light.
zz Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal
direction.
zz Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
zz Fine lines and subject outlines.
zz Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
zz Night scenes or points of light.
zz The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
zz Extremely small subjects.
zz Subjects at the edge of the screen.
zz Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
zz Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a
cage, etc.).
zz Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to
camera shake or subject blur.
zz Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
zz Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
zz A special effect filter is used.
zz Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and
settings such as aspect ratio, movie recording quality, and Movie digital IS.
179
Eye Detection AF
With the AF method set to [u+Tracking], the camera can focus on people’s
eyes.
1Select [z: Eye Detection AF].
2Select [Enable].
the camera at the subject.
3zAim
z An AF point is displayed around
their eye.
zz You can tap the screen to select an eye
for focus.
zz The entire face is selected when you tap
other facial features, such as their nose
or mouth. Eyes to focus on are selected
automatically.
4Take the picture.
zz Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and
shooting conditions.
zz [Eye Detection AF] can be set by pressing the <M> button when you
have set [AF method] to [u+Tracking] on the Quick Control screen after
pressing <0>.
180
Continuous AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to
focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.
1Select [z: Continuous AF].
2Select [Enable].
zz Enabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the lens
is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
181
Focus Mode
You can specify the method of focusing (focus mode) when using EF-M
lenses.
1Select [z: Focus mode].
a setting item.
2zSelect
z [AF]: Autofocus
zz [MF]: Manual focus
182
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF
M
For EF-M, EF, or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing,
you can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.
1Select [z: Lens electronic MF].
2Select an item.
zz [
] Disable after One-Shot AF
zz [
] Enable after One-Shot AF
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep
holding down the shutter button halfway.
zz For details on your lens’s manual focus specifications, refer to the lens
instruction manual.
183
AF-Assist Beam Firing
You can enable firing of the camera’s AF-assist beam.
1Select [z: AF-assist beam firing].
2Select an item.
zz [ON] Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
zz [OFF] Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the
AF‑assist beam.
184
Manual Focus
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and
focus manually.
[z: Focus mode] to [MF].
1zSetz Turn
the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the image.
2zMagnify
z Each tap of [u] changes the screen, as
follows.
1× → 5× → 10×
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (approx.)
(3)
an area to magnify.
3zDetermine
z You can move the magnified area by
scrolling with your finger after you tap.
zz To center the magnified area, tap [e].
185
Manual Focus
manually.
4zFocus
z While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
zz After achieving focus, tap [u] to return
to the normal view.
5Take the picture.
zz When using non EF-M lenses, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> in
step 1.
zz Even with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.
186
Setting MF Peaking
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color as you focus manually
to make it easier to focus. You can set the outline color and adjust the
sensitivity (level) of edge detection.
1Select [z: MF peaking settings].
[Peaking].
2zSelect
z Select [On].
and color.
3zSetz Settheit aslevel
necessary.
zz Peaking display is not shown during magnified display.
zz MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when
expanded ISO speed is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking]
to [Off].
zz Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
187
Image Stabilization
You can adjust the Image Stabilizer (IS) setting when using IS-equipped
EF-M lenses. For details on [k Digital IS], see =233.
1Select [z: IS settings].
2Select [IS mode].
an option.
3zSetz [Off]
Deactivates image stabilization.
zz [On]
Camera shake will be corrected.
zz [IS mode] is not displayed for IS-equipped EF or EF-S lenses.
zz If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on
a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. Additionally, you should set
[IS mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera.
188
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
M
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure
separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the picture. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
on the subject.
1zFocus
z Press the shutter button halfway.
the <A> button.
2zPress
z A [A] icon is displayed in the lower left
of the screen to indicate that exposure is
locked (AE lock).
zz To cancel AE Lock, press the <A>
button again.
3Recompose and take the picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering
Mode
AF Point Selection Method
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
q
Exposure centered on the AF point Exposure centered on the selected
in focus is locked.
AF point is locked.
wre
Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
* When set to [q] with [z: Focus mode] set to [MF], exposure at the center of the
screen is locked.
zz AE lock is not available in bulb exposure.
189
Type of Digest Movie
Both still photos and clips are captured when you shoot in [D] mode, but
you can specify whether to include the still photos in the resulting digest
movie.
1Set the shooting mode to [D].
2Select [z: Digest type].
3Set an option.
zz [Include stills]
Digest movies include still photos.
zz [No stills]
Digest movies do not include still photos.
190
Remote Control Shooting
You can shoot remotely by using an optional Wireless Remote Control BR‑E1,
which pairs via Bluetooth.
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the
camera.
After pairing the camera and BR-E1 (=387), set the drive mode to [Q]
(=134).
For operation procedures, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
zz Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
zz The remote control can also be used for movie recording (=235).
191
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
zz Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
Image Quality
zz When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding)
may become noticeable.
zz Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
zz Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. When you are not shooting, always
turn off the camera.
zz If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high,
image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before
shooting again.
White [s] and Red [E] Internal Temperature Warning Icons
zz If the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot
environments, a white [s] or red [E] icon will appear.
zz The white [s] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline.
Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
zz The red [E] icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically. Shooting
will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop
shooting temporarily or turn off the camera and let it cool down a while.
zz Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [s]
or red [E] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off
the camera.
zz If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a
high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [s] icon
is displayed.
Shooting Results
zz In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in
orange. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
zz Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with
the image area of the normal view.
192
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Images and Display
zz Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the
brightness of the captured image.
zz Under low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO
speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality varies
between display and captured images.
zz The screen or exposure value may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes.
In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you
will use.
zz Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct
display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
zz If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show
the bright area.
zz In low light, if you set the [5: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise or
irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular colors
will not be recorded in the captured image.
zz When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual image.
Lens
zz Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an IS-equipped EF-M lens with [IS mode] in
[z: IS settings] set to [On]. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power
and may decrease the number of possible shots depending on the shooting
conditions. Setting [IS mode] to [Off] is recommended when you are using
a tripod or other means to secure the camera.
zz With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
zz With an optional HDMI cable (camera end: Type D), you can display images on
a television (=270). Note that no sound will be output.
193
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see =501.
zz When [g] is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at the
brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.
zz If [g] is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that
differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting. Note that
the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
zz Exposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings.
The [g] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be
displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be
properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
zz The histogram can be displayed when [z: Expo. simulation] is set to [Enable]
(=146).
194
Movie Recording
For movie recording, set the shooting mode switch
to <k>.
zz You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo
shooting.
zz You can specify movie recording mode in [z: Shooting mode] after setting
the shooting mode switch to <k>.
195
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
zz Shooting settings 1
=198
=205
=212
=213
=128
zz Shooting settings 2
=191
=215
=224
zz Shooting settings 3
=137
=236
=141
=142
=145
196
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
zz Shooting settings 4
=147
=150
=152
=154, 157, 160
zz Shooting settings 5
=170
=180
=231
=182
=238
zz Shooting settings 6
=183
=187
=188
=239
197
Movie Mode
[k] Autoexposure Recording
Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
the shooting mode switch
1Set
to <k>.
2Tap the shooting mode icon.
the shooting mode to [k].
3zSetz Select
[k] (Movie auto exposure),
then press <0>.
on the subject.
4zFocus
z Before recording a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (=172–=179,
=185).
zz By default, [z: Movie Servo AF] is set
to [Enable] so that the camera always
keeps focusing (=231).
zz When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with the
current AF method.
198
Movie Mode
the movie.
5zRecord
z Press the movie shooting button to start
(1)
recording a movie.
zz While the movie is being recorded, the
[oREC] mark (1) will be displayed on
the upper right of the screen.
zz Sound is recorded by the microphones
at the positions indicated (2).
zz To stop recording the movie, press the
movie shooting button again.
(2)
zz You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button. To cancel,
press the <A> button again. (Retained until the <A> button is pressed again.)
zz Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops.
zz ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded in movie Exif
information.
ISO Speed in [k] Mode
ISO speed is set automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see =499.
199
Movie Mode
[M] Manual Exposure Recording
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie
recording.
the shooting mode switch
1Set
to <k>.
the shooting mode to [M].
2zSetz Select
[M] (Movie manual exposure),
then press <0>.
(=202).
3zSetz TapthetheISOISOspeed
speed icon.
zz With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (=111).
the desired shutter speed.
4zSetz Turn
the <6> dial to set it.
zz Shutter speed can be set in a range of
1/4000–1/8 sec.
(1)
the aperture value.
5zSetz Press
the <W> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <6> dial to set a
value.
(2)
200
Movie Mode
and record the movie.
6zFocus
z The procedure is the same as
steps 4 and 5 for “[k] Autoexposure
Recording” (=198).
zz Double-check camera settings before recording movies if you change the
shooting mode switch from <A> or <z> to <k>.
zz During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.
Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high
ISO speeds.
zz When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
zz If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or
LED lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
zz With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
zz When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
To cancel, press the <A> button again. (Retained until the <A> button is
pressed again.)
zz If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when
the <A> button was pressed.
zz With the camera ready to shoot in the [M] mode, you can display the
histogram by pressing the <B> button.
201
Movie Mode
ISO Speed for [Movie manual exp.]
You can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically.
For details on the ISO speed, see =499.
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken in movie modes. To shoot still photos,
set the shooting mode switch to <A> or <z>.
Information Display (Movie Recording)
For details on the icons displayed for movie recording, see =503.
202
Movie Mode
Cautions for Movie Recording
zz Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
zz If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
zz If [Q] or [Qw] is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
recording, the white balance may also change.
zz If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
flicker.
zz If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise
may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic
focusing ring.
zz Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.
zz Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
zz During movie recording, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness is
recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical sound of
the lens is recorded.
zz Avoid covering the built-in microphones (=199) with your fingers or other
objects.
zz “General Movie Recording Cautions” are on =240–=241.
zz If necessary, also read “General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” on
=192–=193.
203
Movie Mode
Notes for Movie Recording
zz Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
zz The movie’s field of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies is
approx. 100%.
zz To enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [5: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Start/stop mov rec].
zz Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (=199).
zz With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
zz YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.
204
Movie Recording Quality
On the [z: Movie rec quality] tab, select
[Movie rec. size] to set the image size,
frame rate, and compression method.
The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [5: Video system]
setting (=443).
zz The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording
size. Before recording movies, see =497 to check the performance
requirements of the card.
Image Size
zz [H] 3840×2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
Not available unless the shooting mode switch is set to <k>.
zz [L] 1920×1080
The movie is recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The aspect
ratio is 16:9.
zz [w] 1280×720
The movie is recorded in High-Definition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio
is 16:9.
zz If you change the [5: Video system] setting, also set [z: Movie rec. size]
again.
zz Normal playback of 4K and L8/7 movies may not be possible on other
devices, because playback is processing-intensive.
zz Clarity and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording size, the lens
used, and other settings.
zz Movies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.
205
Movie Recording Quality
4K Movie Recording
zz Recording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details,
see “Cards that Can Record Movies” (=497).
zz The maximum recording time per 4K movie is 9 min. 59 sec. (=211).
zz Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may
cause the camera’s internal temperature to increase faster or become
higher than for regular movies. If [ ] or a red [E] icon appears
during movie recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording
the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card.
(Do not remove the card immediately.)
zz From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx.
8.3 megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (=266).
zz Contrast detection is used to focus when recording 4K movies. Focusing may
take longer and be more difficult than when recording HD or Full HD movies.
206
Movie Recording Quality
Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)
zz [2] 119.88fps/[8] 59.94fps/[6] 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
zz [3] 100.00fps/[7] 50.00fps/[5] 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia,
etc.).
zz [4] 23.98fps
Mainly for motion pictures. 4 (23.98 fps) is available when [5: Video
system] is set to [For NTSC].
Compression Method
zz [X] IPB (Standard)
Uses IPB compression for normal movie recording. Compresses multiple
frames at a time efficiently for recording.
zz [W] ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Uses ALL-I compression for time-lapse movie recording (=215).
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although file sizes
are larger than with IPB (Standard), movies are more suitable for editing.
Movie Recording Format
zz [C] MP4
All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie files in MP4
format (file extension “.MP4”).
207
Movie Recording Quality
Cards that Can Record Movies
For details on cards you can use for various movie recording sizes,
see =497.
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing and reading
speed (as specified in card performance requirements) shown in the
table on =497 or higher than the standard specification. Test cards by
recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specified size (=205).
zz Format cards before recording 4K movies (=433).
zz If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
zz When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
zz When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again.
If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
zz To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended (=433).
zz To check the card’s writing and reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website, etc.
208
Movie Recording Quality
High Frame Rate
You can record HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.88 fps or 100.00 fps
by setting [High Frame Rate] under [z: Movie rec quality] to [Enable].
This is ideal for recording movies that will be played back in slow motion.
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec.
Movies are recorded as w2X or
w3X.
Movie Servo AF and Movie digital IS have
no effect when recording High Frame Rate
movies. AF is not used to focus.
Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps
movie files, they are played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
zz Check the [Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
zz The screen may flicker if you record High Frame Rate movies under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
zz For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the
movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
zz Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies
do not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
zz Sound is not recorded.
209
Movie Recording Quality
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without
interruption.
zz Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will
format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie
file individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
and play it back.
zz Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it
in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4 GB
during movie recording, the movie will be saved as a single file (rather
than being split into multiple files).
zz When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS
Utility or a card reader (=475). It may not be possible to save movie files
exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer’s
operating system.
210
Movie Recording Quality
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
For details on file sizes and the recording time available at each movie
recording size, see =498.
Movie Recording Time Limit
zz When recording 4K movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 9 min. 59 sec. Once 9 min.
59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new file).
zz When recording Full HD/HD movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min.
59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new file).
zz When recording High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Once 7 min.
29 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a High Frame Rate movie again by pressing the movie shooting button
(which records the movie as a new file).
211
Movie Self-Timer
Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.
1Select z [Movie self-timer].
2Select an item.
the movie.
3zRecord
z After you tap [o] or press the movie
shooting button, the camera beeps and
displays number of seconds left before
recording.
212
Sound Recording
You can record movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo microphone.
You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level.
Use [z: Sound recording] to set sound
recording functions.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
zz Auto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control
will take effect automatically in response to the sound level.
zz Manual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Select [Rec. level]
and press the <Y> <Z> keys while looking at the level meter to adjust
the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so
that the level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the [12] (–12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds [0], the sound will be distorted.
zz Disable
Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter
Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind
outdoors. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass
sounds will also be reduced.
213
Sound Recording
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if
[Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion
may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable]
is recommended.
zz If you use the Wi-Fi (wireless communication) function with a microphone, the
sound noise may be recorded. During sound recording, using the wireless
communication function is not recommended.
zz The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound and
mechanical sound of the camera during shooting.
zz [Sound rec.] changes to [Sound recording]: [On]/[Off] in [A], [D], Special
scene, and Creative filters modes. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the
recording level.
zz Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI,
except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
zz The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.
zz Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
214
Time-lapse Movies
Images shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create
a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It is
effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing plants,
celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following
quality: H6W (NTSC)/H5W (PAL) for 4K shooting, and
L6W (NTSC)/L5W (PAL) for Full HD shooting.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the
[5: Video system] setting (=443).
a shooting mode.
1zSelect
z Select [k] (=198) or [M] (=200).
2Select [z: Time-lapse movie].
3Select [Time-lapse].
a scene.
4zSelect
z Select a scene to suit the shooting
situation.
zz For greater freedom when setting the
shooting interval and number of shots
manually, select [Custom].
215
Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval.
5zSetz Select
[Interval/shots].
zz Select [Interval] (sec.). Use the
<Y> <Z> keys to set a value.
zz Refer to [k: Time required] (1)
and [3: Playback time] (2) to set
the number.
When [Custom] is set
(1)
(2)
zz Select [Interval] (min.:sec.).
zz Press <0> to display [r].
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to [s].)
the number of shots.
6zSetz Select
[No. of shots]. Use the
<Y> <Z> keys to set a value,
then press <0>.
zz Refer to the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] to set the number.
When [Custom] is set
zz Select the digit.
zz Press <0> to display [r].
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to [s].)
zz Check that [3: Playback time] is not
displayed in orange.
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
zz With [Scene**], available intervals and numbers of shots are restricted, to suit
the type of scene.
zz If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.
2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
216
Time-lapse Movies
the desired movie recording
7Select
size.
zz H (3840×2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame
rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and
movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W) compression.
zz L (1920×1080)
The movie is recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The aspect
ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps
(5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I
(W) compression.
zz The H6H5 bit rate is approx. 300 Mbps, and the L6L5 bit
rate, approx. 90 Mbps. Use a card with a sufficiently fast read speed.
217
Time-lapse Movies
8Configure [Auto exposure].
zz Fixed 1st frame
When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings
for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
zz Each frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions such as
Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be set
automatically for each subsequent shot.
9Configure [Screen auto off].
zz Disable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed.
Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the
recording started.
zz Enable
Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the
shooting started.
zz During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the <B> button to turn
on/off the screen.
218
Time-lapse Movies
the beeper.
10 zSetz Select
[Beep as img taken].
zz If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
11 Check the settings.
(1)
(2)
(1) Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
(2) Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD
movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
219
Time-lapse Movies
the menu.
12 zClose
z Press the <M> button to turn off the
menu screen.
the time-lapse movie.
13 zRecord
z Press the shutter button halfway to
(1)
220
check the focus and exposure.
zz Press the <o> button to start timelapse movie recording.
zz The number of shots remaining is
displayed (1).
zz While the time-lapse movie is recorded,
[oREC] is displayed.
zz AF will not work during time-lapse movie
recording.
zz Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the shutter make no
mechanical sound during time-lapse
movie recording.
zz When the set number of shots are taken,
the time-lapse movie recording ends.
zz To cancel recording time-lapse movies,
set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
Time-lapse Movies
zz If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of shots,
[Playback time] will be displayed in orange. Although the camera can continue
shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
zz If the movie file size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and the
card is not formatted in exFAT (=434), [Playback time] will be displayed in
orange. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie file size reaches
4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.
zz Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
zz Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a
computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.
zz Movie Servo AF will not function.
zz Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens
may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens
aberration correction not to function properly.
zz When recording a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable image
flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
zz Images that are displayed while time-lapse movies are being recorded may
look different from the resulting movie. (For example, there may be inconsistent
brightness from flickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO speed.)
zz When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during
shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the movie.
zz If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject
during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
zz During time-lapse movie recording, auto power off will not take effect. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back
images, etc.
zz Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
zz With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each
frame], if the brightness differs greatly from the preceding shot, the camera
may not shoot at the set interval.
221
Time-lapse Movies
zz If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten
the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
zz If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
zz The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the
time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a
movie file.
zz If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS
Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option
other than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer.
zz During time-lapse movie recording, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
zz Time-lapse movie recording ends if the camera is turned off, and the setting
changes to [Disable].
zz Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
zz The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and
switch the setting to [Disable].
yySelecting [Basic settings] in [5: Reset camera]
yyUsing the shooting mode switch
zz If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white [s] icon (=192)
is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is
recommended that you start time-lapse movie recording after the white [s]
icon disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).
zz With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in
some modes.
222
Time-lapse Movies
zz Using a tripod is recommended.
zz Recording test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended.
zz The movie’s field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse
movie recording is approx. 100%.
zz To cancel the time-lapse movie recording, press the <o> button. The timelapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
zz You can play back the recorded time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
zz If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
zz Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie file will
still be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.
zz If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories
(sold separately) is recommended.
zz YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.
zz You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop
the time-lapse movie recording.
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
yyFirst, pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (=387).
yyMake sure [z: Remote control] is set to [Enable].
223
Video Snapshots
Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and
the camera will combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows
these highlights of your trip or event.
Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to
L6X (NTSC) / L5X (PAL).
Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music
(=299).
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
a shooting mode.
1zSelect
z Select [k] (=198) or [M] (=200).
2Select [z: Video snapshot].
3Select [Enable].
224
Video Snapshots
4Select [Album settings].
[Create a new album].
5zSelect
z Read the message and select [OK].
the playback time.
6zSpecify
z Specify playback time per video
snapshot.
the playback effect.
7zSpecify
z This setting determines how fast albums
are played back.
the required recording time.
8zCheck
z The time required to record each video
snapshot is indicated (1), based on the
playback time and effect.
(1)
225
Video Snapshots
the menu.
9zClose
z Press the <M> button to close the
menu.
zz A blue bar is displayed to indicate the
recording time (2).
(2)
the first video snapshot.
10 zRecord
z Press the movie shooting button to start
recording.
zz The blue bar indicating recording time
gradually decreases, and after the
specified time elapses, recording stops
automatically.
zz A confirmation message is displayed
(=227).
as a video snapshot album.
11 zSave
z Select [J Save as album].
zz The clip is saved as the first video
snapshot in the album.
your next video snapshots.
12 zRecord
z Repeat step 10 to record the next video
snapshot.
zz Select [J Add to album].
zz To create another album, select
[W Save as a new album].
zz Repeat step 12 as needed.
226
Video Snapshots
recording video snapshots.
13 zStop
z Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie recording,
be sure to specify [Disable].
zz Press the <M> button to close
the menu and return to normal movie
recording.
Options in Steps 11 and 12
Function
Description
J Save as album (step 11)
Saves the clip as the first video snapshot in an
album.
J Add to album (step 12)
Adds the current video snapshot to the album
recorded most recently.
Creates a new album and saves the clip as the
W Save as a new album (step 12) first video snapshot. This album file is different
from the one recorded most recently.
1 Playback video snapshot
(steps 11, 12)
Plays the video snapshot just recorded.
r Do not save to album (step 11)
r Delete without saving to album
(step 12)
Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot
without saving it to an album. Select [OK] on the
confirmation dialog.
zz If you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show confirm
msg] under [z: Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables you to
record the next video snapshot immediately, without a confirmation message.
227
Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
[Add to existing album].
1zSelect
z Follow step 5 on =225 to select
[Add to existing album].
an existing album.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
existing album, then press <0>.
zz Select [OK].
zz Some video snapshot settings will be
updated to match settings of the existing
album.
the menu.
3zClose
z Press the <M> button to close
the menu.
zz The video snapshot recording screen
is displayed.
a video snapshot.
4zRecord
z Record the video snapshot as described
in step 10 of “Video Snapshot”
(=224).
zz You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
General Video Snapshot Precautions
zz No sound is recorded when you set [Playback effect] to [1/2x speed] or
[2x speed].
zz Recording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may differ slightly
from the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate
and other factors.
228
Miniature Effect Movie
By blurring image areas outside a selected area, you can record movies
with a miniature model effect applied. By choosing the playback speed
before the movie is recorded, you can also make movies that look like
scenes happening in miniature models, with people and objects in the scene
moving quickly during playback. Sound is not recorded.
[ ].
1zSelect
z Press <0>, and on the Quick Control
screen, select [ ].
], [
], or [
zz Select [
playback speed.
] as the
the scene frame.
2zMove
z Use the scene frame to set an area that
will look sharp.
zz To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <B>
button or tap [r] in the lower right of the
screen.
zz To switch between vertical and horizontal
scene frame orientation, tap [T] in the
lower left of the screen.
zz To move a horizontal scene frame,
press the <W> <X> keys, and to
move a vertical scene frame, press the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz To return the scene frame to the center
of the screen, tap [e] in the lower left
of the screen.
zz Press <0> to confirm the position of
the scene frame. Next, set the AF point.
229
Miniature Effect Movie
the AF point.
3zMove
z The AF point turns orange and can be
moved.
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on.
zz Aligning the AF point and scene frame is
recommended.
zz To return the AF point to the center of
the screen, tap [e] in the lower left of
the screen.
zz Press <0> to confirm the position of
the AF point.
the movie.
4zRecord
z Press the movie shooting button.
Estimated playback speed and time for a movie recorded for
one minute
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
zz To make people and objects in the scene move quickly during playback, select
[
], [
], or [
] before recording the movie. The scene will resemble a
miniature model.
zz Sound is not recorded.
zz You can switch the scene frame orientation in step 2 with the <Y> <Z> keys
when in horizontal orientation or the <W> <X> keys when in vertical orientation.
230
Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously
during movie recording.
1Select [z: Movie Servo AF].
2Select [Enable].
zz When [Enable] is set:
zz The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
zz To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record
mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie
Servo AF by tapping [Z] in the lower left of the screen.
zz When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after
operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or changing
the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
zz When [Disable] is set:
zz Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
231
Movie Servo AF
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
zz Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
yyA fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
yyA subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
yyWhen shooting with a higher f/number.
yyAlso see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” (=179).
zz Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time (=498) will be shortened.
zz Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
zz During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie image
may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnification).
232
Movie Digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during
movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. When using a lens
with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the lens’s Image Stabilizer switch
to <1>.
1Select [z: IS settings].
2Select [k Digital IS].
3Select a setting item.
zz Disable (v)
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
zz Enable (w)
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
zz Enhanced (x) (Not displayed for still photos shooting.)
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnified.
233
Movie Digital IS
Combination IS
Even more effective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie
digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical
and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.
zz Movie digital IS has no effect with a lens without Image Stabilizer, or when the
lens IS switch is set to <2>. (In this case, when [Enable] or [Enhanced] is
specified, the Movie digital IS icon blinks.)
zz With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not
function.
zz Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording
sizes.
zz The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image
stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less
effective the image stabilization will be.
zz When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
zz Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the
Movie digital IS.
zz When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital
IS to [Disable] is recommended.
zz Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy.
Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
zz For details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon website.
zz “+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (=233) when a lens compatible with
Combination IS is used.
234
Other Menu Functions
[z1]
zz Shooting mode
Available options include autoexposure and manual exposure movie
recording.
zz Lens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination and chromatic aberration can be corrected as you
record movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see =128.
[z2]
zz Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1
with the camera (=387).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
For normal movie recording, set the BR-E1 release timing/movie
shooting switch to <k>, then press the release button.
For details on Time-lapse movie recording, see =223.
235
Other Menu Functions
[z3]
zz Exposure compensation
Exposure compensation is available in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3-stop
increments. For details on exposure compensation, see =137.
zz k ISO speed settings
ISO speed
In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also
select ISO Auto.
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in Full HD/HD movie
recording in [k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto.
zz ISO 16000/20000/25600 for Full HD/HD movie recording is an expanded ISO
speed (indicated by [H]).
zz Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. For details on
Auto Lighting Optimizer, see =141.
zz Highlight tone priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies.
For details on Highlight tone priority, see =142.
zz [Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with
[z: Highlight tone priority] set.
zz Metering timer
For details on the metering timer, see =145.
236
Other Menu Functions
[z4]
zz White balance
For details on white balance, see =147.
zz Custom White Balance
For details on custom white balance, see =150.
zz White balance correction
For details on white balance correction, see =152.
zz Picture Style
For details on Picture Styles, see =154.
[z5]
zz AF method
For details on AF methods, see =170.
zz Eye Detection AF
For details on Eye Detection AF, see =180.
zz Focus mode
For details on focus modes, see =182.
237
Other Menu Functions
zz HDMI information display
You can configure information display for
image output via an HDMI cable.
With info
The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is
shown on the other device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen
goes off. Recorded movies are saved to the card.
Clean / H output
HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and
AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded
to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
Clean / L output
HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information
and AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is
recorded to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
[z6]
zz Lens electronic MF
For details on Lens electronic MF, see =183.
zz MF peaking settings
For details on MF peaking settings, see =187.
zz IS settings
For details on image stabilization, see =188.
238
Other Menu Functions
zz k Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to record movies
that are brighter than when set to [Disable]
by automatically slowing the shutter speed
under low light.
Applies when the frame rate of the movie
recording size is 8 or 7.
Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement,
less affected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that
under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable]
by automatically reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or
1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
zz Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under
low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
239
General Movie Recording Cautions
Red [E] Internal Temperature Warning Icon
zz If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
recording or under a high ambient temperature, a red [E] icon will appear.
zz The red [E] icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
zz Recording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the
red [E] icon to appear earlier. When you are not recording, always turn off the
camera.
[
] Display
zz If [
] is displayed, see =483.
Recording and Image Quality
zz Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an IS-equipped EF-M lens with [IS mode] in
[z: IS settings] set to [On] or an EF/EF-S lens with the IS switch set to <1>.
The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
recording time depending on the shooting conditions. Disabling the Image
Stabilizer is recommended when you are using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera.
zz If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
zz If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the
screen.
zz Image noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds,
high temperatures, low shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded
almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in time-lapse movie
recording.
zz If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may decline
or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4 format).
240
General Movie Recording Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
zz If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator
may appear on the right of the screen during movie
recording. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal
buffer memory). The slower the card, the faster the
(1)
indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes
full, movie recording will stop automatically.
zz If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the
level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, record a few test movies to see
if the card can write fast enough.
zz If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
zz If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Audio Restrictions
zz The following restrictions apply when recording movies that include sound.
yySound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
yyWhen you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
241
242
Flash Photography
This chapter describes how to shoot with flash.
zz Flash cannot be used while you are recording movies.
243
Flash Photography
Using flash is recommended when the [I] icon is displayed on the screen,
when subjects in daytime shots are backlit, or when you shoot under
low light.
the <I> lever to raise the
1Use
flash.
the shutter button halfway.
2zPress
z Confirm that a [I] icon appears on the
screen.
the picture.
3zTake
z The flash fires according to
[Flash firing] settings (=249).
zz To retract the flash after shooting, push
it down with your fingers until it clicks
into place.
Approximate Flash Range
(Maximum approx. range in meters/feet)
EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM
ISO Speed
(=138)
Wide-angle End
f/3.5
f/6.3
400
2.9/9.5
1.6/5.2
3200
8.1/26.6
4.5/14.8
Telephoto End
* It may not be possible to obtain standard exposure when shooting distant subjects at
high ISO speeds, or under certain subject conditions.
244
Flash Photography
Shutter Speed and Aperture Value in Flash Photography
Shooting Mode
Shutter Speed
Aperture Value
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)*
Automatically set
s
Manual (1/200–30 sec.)
Automatically set
f
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)*
Manually set
Manual (1/200–30 sec., Bulb)
Manually set
d
4
* When [Slow synchro] under [z: Flash control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
zz Do not use the flash unless it is fully raised.
zz The bottom of images may be dark if light from the flash is obstructed by a lens
hood, or by a subject that is too close.
Flash Photography in [f] Mode
Flash output is automatically adjusted to provide suitable flash exposure for
your specified aperture value.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with autoflash metering and the
background with a slow shutter speed, to provide standard exposure for
both the subject and background. Using a tripod is recommended.
245
Flash Exposure Compensation
M
Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust flash output.
1Press <Z>.
2Press the <M> button.
3Select [2exp. comp.].
amount.
4zSetz Tothemakecompensation
flash exposure brighter, set the
compensation amount toward [Brighter]
(positive compensation), or to make it
darker, set it toward [Darker] (negative
compensation).
zz After you are finished shooting, follow
steps 1–3 to return the compensation
amount to zero.
zz When [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=141) is set to an option other than
[Disable], images may still look bright even if negative compensation is set.
zz The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you turn off the camera.
zz Flash exposure compensation can also be set by turning the <6> dial in step 2.
zz You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash settings] in
[z: Flash control] (=252).
246
FE Lock
M
Shooting with FE (flash exposure) Lock provides suitable flash exposure
over your specified area of the subject.
the <I> lever to raise the
1Use
flash.
zz Press the shutter button halfway and
confirm that a [I] icon appears on the
screen.
2Focus on the subject.
the <A> button (8).
3zPress
z Center the subject on the screen, then
press the <A> button.
zz A preflash is fired by the flash, and the
required flash output level is retained.
zz [d] is lit.
zz Each time you press the <A> button,
a preflash is fired, and the flash output
required for shooting is retained.
the picture.
4zTake
z Compose the shot and press the shutter
button completely.
zz The [D] icon blinks when subjects are too far away and your shots would be
dark. Approach the subject and repeat steps 2–4.
247
Flash Control
Functions of the flash can be set from menu screens on the camera.
1Select [z: Flash control].
2Select an item.
248
Flash Control
Flash Firing
Set to [a] to have the flash fire
automatically, based on shooting
conditions.
Set to [D] to have the flash always fire
when you shoot.
Set to [b] to disable flash firing.
zz The information displayed varies by shooting mode.
zz Can also be set (except in some shooting modes) by pressing the <D> button
when the shooting mode switch is set to <A> or <z>.
E-TTL II Flash MeteringM
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the flash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene.
Red-eye Reduction
Set to [Enable] to reduce red-eye by
emitting the red-eye reduction lamp
(=36) before firing the flash.
249
Flash Control
Slow SynchroM
You can set the flash-sync shutter speed
for flash photography in [f] Aperturepriority AE or [d] Program AE mode.
zz [
] 1/200-30sec. auto
zz [
] 1/200-1/60sec. auto
zz [
] 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under
some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is
automatically lowered.
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light
conditions. It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the
background may come out dark.
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than
with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
zz To use slow-sync shooting in [f] or [d] mode, set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
250
Flash Control
Built-in Flash Function SettingsM
zz Flash mode
Set to [E-TTL II] to shoot in E-TTL II/E-TTL
fully automatic flash mode.
Set to [Manual flash] to specify your
preferred flash output ([Maximum],
[Medium], or [Minimum]) for [2 flash
output].
zz Available in [s], [f], and [a]
modes.
251
Flash Control
zz Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so
that the flash fires immediately after the
exposure starts.
Set to [2nd curtain] and use low shutter
speeds for natural-looking shots of subject
motion trails, such as car headlights.
zz When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/80
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/100 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
zz Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is
adjustable, you can also adjust flash output
(=246).
Clearing Built-in Flash Settings
1Select [Clear settings].
[OK].
2zSelect
z The default settings are now restored.
252
Playback Settings
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back
captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings
on the Playback Settings ([x]) tab.
zz Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for
images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that
have been edited or renamed on a computer.
zz Images may be displayed that cannot be used with certain playback
features.
253
Tab Menus: Playback Settings
zz Playback settings 1
=272
=275
=276
=277
=284
=288
zz Playback settings 2
=291
=294
=296
=297
=300
=302
zz Playback settings 3
=303
=306
=308
=310
254
Tab Menus: Playback Settings
zz Playback settings 4
=312
=314
=315
255
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
back the image.
1zPlay
z Press the <x> button.
an image.
2zSelect
z To play back newer images, press the
<Z> button, and to play back older
images, press the <Y> button.
zz Each time you press the <B> button,
the display will change.
No information
Basic information
display
Shooting information
display
the image playback.
3zExit
z Press the <x> button to exit the image
playback.
256
Image Playback
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the <B>
button to change the information displayed. You can also customize the
information displayed, in [x: Playback information display] (=312).
257
Image Playback
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control
playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones
and similar devices. First, press the <x> button to prepare for touch
playback.
Image browsing
Jump display
Index display
Magnified view
zz You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
258
Magnified Image Display
You can magnify your captured images.
the image.
1zMagnify
z During image playback, turn the <6>
dial clockwise. In magnified view, the
position of the magnified area (1) is
shown in the lower right of the screen.
(1)
the image.
2zScroll
z Press the <V> cross keys to scroll the
image vertically and horizontally.
zz To keep the same position magnified while switching images, tap [g] in
the upper right of the screen, then press the <Y> <Z> keys while [f] is
displayed.
259
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
to the index display.
1zSwitch
z During image playback, turn the <6>
dial counterclockwise.
zz The 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise switches to 9, 36, and
100-image display.
Turning the dial the other way switches
to 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image
display.
B
B
B
B
an image.
2zSelect
z Press the <V> cross keys to move the
orange frame and select the image.
zz Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image.
260
Movie Playback
back the image.
1zPlay
z Press the <x> button.
a movie.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
movie to play back.
zz In the single-image display, the [s1]
icon displayed on the upper left indicates
a movie.
zz In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As rolls cannot be played back
from the index display, press <0> to
switch to the single-image display.
the single-image display,
3Inpress
<0>.
<0> to play back the
4Press
movie.
zz The movie will start playing back.
zz You can pause playback and display
the movie playback panel by pressing
<0>. Press it again to resume the
playback.
zz You can also adjust the volume during
movie playback by using the <W> <X>
keys.
(1)
(1)
Speaker
261
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel
Item
Playback Operations
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T Skip backward
Skips backward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <0>.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
v Skip forward
Skips forward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <0>.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (=264).
I Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.
Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a
JPEG still image (=266).
y Background music
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(=299).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Volume
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume (=261).
zz To skip back or forward approx. 4 sec. during movie playback, press the
<Y> <Z> keys.
262
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and
Digest Movies)
Item
Playback Operations
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T Previous clip
Displays the first frame of the previous clip or video snapshot.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
v Next clip
Displays the first frame of the next clip or video snapshot.
L Erase clip
Erases the current clip or video snapshot.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (=264).
y Background music
Plays back an album with the selected background music
(=299).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Volume
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume (=261).
zz Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback (=270). (Volume cannot be adjusted with the
<W> <X> keys.)
zz Movie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie files
have corrupted frames.
zz To skip back or forward to the beginning of the previous or next video snapshot
or clip during playback of video snapshot albums or digest movies, press the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz For details on the movie recording time available, see =498.
263
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
movie playback.
1zPause
z The movie playback panel will appear.
the movie playback panel,
2On
select [X].
the part to be edited out.
3zSpecify
z Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or [V]
(Cut end).
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys for frame-byframe playback.
zz After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion indicated by
a line at the bottom of the screen will
remain.
the edited movie.
4zCheck
z Select [7] to play the edited movie.
zz To change the edited part, go back to
step 3.
zz To cancel the editing, press the <M>
button.
264
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the image.
5zSave
z Select [W] (1).
(1) (2)
zz The save screen will appear.
zz To save it as a new roll, select [New
file]. To save it and overwrite the original
movie file, select [Overwrite].
] (2) to save a compressed
zz Select [
version of the file. A separate version is
saved, with 4K movies compressed and
converted to Full HD.
zz On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]
to save the edited movie and return to
the movie playback screen.
zz Because editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the position
indicated by [ ] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies
are trimmed may differ from your specified position.
zz Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
zz You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
zz [ ] is not available for movies created with [Save compressed version],
because further compression and saving is not possible.
zz For instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see “Create Album” (=297).
265
Frame Extraction
From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual
frames to save as approx. 8.3 megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images.
This function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
back the image.
1zPlay
z Press the <3> button.
a 4K movie.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a 4K
movie or 4K time-lapse movie.
zz On the shooting information screen
(=508), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse
movies are indicated by an [H] icon.
zz In index display, press <0> to switch
to single-image display.
the single-image display,
3Inpress
<0>.
movie playback.
4zPause
z The movie playback panel will appear.
a frame to grab.
5zSelect
z Use the movie playback panel to select
the frame to grab as a still photo.
zz For movie playback panel instructions,
see =262.
[I].
6zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [I].
266
Frame Extraction
the image.
7zSave
z Select [OK] to save the current frame as
a JPEG still image.
the image to display.
8zSelect
z Check the destination folder and image
file number.
zz Select [View original movie] or [View
extracted still image].
zz Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse movies,
HD movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a different camera.
267
Digest Movie Editing
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in <D> mode can be erased.
Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
back the image.
1zPlay
z Press the <x> button.
a digest movie.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
digest movie.
zz In single-image display, digest movies
are labeled with [sD] in the upper
left of the screen.
zz In index display, press <0> to switch
to single-image display.
the single-image display,
3Inpress
<0>.
[D].
4zSelect
z Digest movie playback begins.
<0> to pause the digest
5Press
movie.
zz The movie playback panel will appear.
a clip.
6zSelect
z Select [T] or [v] to select a clip.
268
Digest Movie Editing
7Select [L].
[OK].
8zSelect
z The clip is erased, and the digest movie
is overwritten.
zz Video snapshot albums can also be edited. Albums created with [x: Create
album] cannot be edited.
zz For other instructions on using the movie playback panel for digest movies, see
“Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and Digest Movies)” (=263).
269
Playback on a TV Set
You can view your shots and movies on a TV by connecting the camera to a
TV with an HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m/8.2 ft., with a Type D terminal
on the camera end).
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [5: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your television).
the HDMI cable to the
1Connect
camera.
zz Insert the cable plug in the <k>
terminal.
the HDMI cable to the
2Connect
television.
zz Connect the HDMI cable to the
television’s HDMI IN port.
on the television and switch
3Turn
the television’s video input to
select the connected port.
4Turn the camera on.
the <x> button.
5zPress
z The image will appear on the TV screen.
(Nothing will be displayed on the camera
screen.)
zz The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
270
Playback on a TV Set
zz Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
zz Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn off the camera and television.
zz Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
zz Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <k> terminal.
Doing so may cause a malfunction.
zz Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
zz It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set
[5: HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (=447).
zz Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to
a television.
271
Protect Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Protecting a Single Image
1Select [3: Protect images].
2Select [Select images].
an image.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to protect.
(1)
the image.
4zProtect
z Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The [K] icon (1) will appear at
the top of the screen.
zz To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The [K] icon will
disappear.
zz To protect another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
272
Protect Images
Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1zSelect
z Select [Select range] in [3: Protect
images].
the range of images.
2zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
zz The images in the specified range will be
protected and the [J] icon will appear.
zz To select another image to be protected,
repeat step 2.
273
Protect Images
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [3: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect
all images in folder] or [Unprotect all
images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=308), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all
found].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be protected.
If you select [Unprotect all found], the
protection of all the filtered images will be
canceled.
zz If you format the card (=433), the protected images will also be erased.
zz Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
zz If you erase all the images (=280), only the protected images will remain.
This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.
274
Rotate Still Photos
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired
orientation.
1Select [3: Rotate stills].
an image.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to rotate.
the image.
3zRotate
z Each time you press <0>, the image
will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° →
270° → 0°.
zz To rotate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
zz If you set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (=431) before taking vertical shots,
you need not rotate the image with this function.
zz If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image
playback, set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
275
Change Movie Orientation Information
You can manually change movie orientation information (which determines
which side is up).
1[x: Change mov rotate info]
a movie.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
movie with orientation information
to change.
<0>.
3zPress
z As you watch the image orientation icon
in the upper left of the screen, press
<0> to specify which side is up.
zz Orientation information of digest movies and video snapshot albums cannot be
changed.
zz Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [5: Add k
rotate info] (=432) setting.
276
Erase Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase
them in one batch. Protected images (=272) will not be erased.
zz Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer
need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing a Single Image
the image to be erased.
1zSelect
z Press the <x> button.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to erase.
2Press the <L> button.
3Erase the images.
JPEG or RAW images or movies
zz Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG images
zz Select an item.
277
Erase Images
Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those
images at once.
1Select [3: Erase images].
2Select [Select and erase images].
an image.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to erase, then press <0>.
zz To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the images.
4zErase
z Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
278
Erase Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1zSelect
z Select [Select range] in [3: Erase
images].
the range of images.
2zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
3Press the <M> button.
the images.
4zErase
z Select [OK].
279
Erase Images
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [3: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=308), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be erased.
zz To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (=433).
280
Prepare to Print
All operations in direct printing are performed on the camera, as you view
screens for camera operations.
Connecting the Camera and Printer
the printer.
1zPrepare
z For details, refer to the printer’s
2
instruction manual.
Connect the camera to the printer
with an interface cable (sold
separately).
zz As an interface cable, you can use a
IFC-600PCU cable (sold separately).
zz Insert the cord’s plug into the camera’s
digital terminal (USB Micro-B).
zz Connect the cord’s plug to the printer’s
USB terminal.
3Turn the printer on.
281
Prepare to Print
the camera on.
4zTurn
z Some printers may beep.
zz The image is displayed, along with a
printer connection icon in the upper left
of the screen.
zz Confirm in advance that the printer has a PictBridge-compatible terminal.
zz Movies cannot be printed.
zz Printers only compatible with “CP Direct” or “Bubble Jet Direct” printing cannot
be used.
zz A series of long beeps in step 4 indicates a problem with the printer. Resolve
the problem according to the error message displayed (=366).
zz You can also print RAW images captured with this camera.
zz When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
zz Turn off the camera and printer before disconnecting the cable, and hold the
cable by the plug when disconnecting it.
zz For direct printing, consider powering the camera with DC Coupler DR-E12 and
Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (each sold separately).
282
Print Images
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.
Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
the image to be printed.
1zSelect
z Confirm that an icon is displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
image to print.
(1)
(1) Printer connected icon
<0>.
2BPress
BThe print setting screen appears.
zz For setting details, see “Print Settings”
(=362).
283
Print Ordering
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on
the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection,
quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number
imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specified
for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Option
1Select [3: Print order].
2Select [Set up].
as desired.
3zSetz Setthetheoptions
[Print type], [Date], and
[File No.].
Print type
K Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
sheet.
K
L
Date
File number
284
Both
On
Off
On
Off
Prints both the standard and index prints.
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
[On] imprints the file number.
Print Ordering
the setting.
4zExit
z Press the <M> button.
zz Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to
specify the images to be printed.
zz If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
(=284), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case,
resize the image (=302), then print the index print.
zz Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not
be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
zz With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the
same time.
zz When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are
set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images
from the card for printing.
zz Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print
the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before
printing, or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering
prints.
zz Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF
settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten
inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the
image type.
285
Print Ordering
Specifying Images for Printing
zz Selecting Images
Select and specify the images one by one.
Press the <M> button to save the print
order to the card.
zz Standard/Both
(1)
Press <0> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By pressing the <W>
<X> keys, you can set the number of
copies to be printed up to 99.
(2)
(1)
(2)
Quantity
Total images selected
zz Index
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
(3) (4)
(3)
(4)
Checkmark
Index icon
zz Selecting Multiple Images
Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select range].
Selecting the first and last images of the
range marks all the images in the range
with a checkmark [X], and one copy of
each image will be printed.
286
Print Ordering
All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order
for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all
the images on the card.
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=308) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all
found images] and [Clear all found images].
All Found Images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images
filtered by the search conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered
images will be cleared.
zz RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW images
or movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all images with
[Multiple].
zz When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than
400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may
not all be printed.
287
Photobook Set-up
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook.
When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer,
the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder.
This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1Select [3: Photobook Set-up].
2Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
image, then press <0>.
zz To select other images to be specified
for a photobook, repeat step 3.
288
Photobook Set-up
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range
(start point to end point) of images to be specified for a photobook at once.
[Multiple].
1zSelect
z Under [3: Photobook Set-up],
select [Multiple].
2Select [Select range].
the range of images.
3zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
zz A checkmark [X] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
first and last images.
289
Photobook Set-up
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a
photobook.
Under [x: Photobook Set-up], you can
set [Multiple] to [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] to specify all the
images in the folder or on the card for a
photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in
folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=308) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found
images] and [Clear all found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be specified for the photobook.
If you select [Clear all found images], all
the photobook order of the filtered images
will be cleared.
zz RAW images or movies cannot be specified for the photobook. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specified for the photobook even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
zz Do not use this camera to configure photobook settings for images with
photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may
be overwritten inadvertently.
290
Creative Filters
You can apply the following filter processing to an image and save it as a
separate image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1Select [3: Creative filters].
an image.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
3Select a filter effect (=292).
the filter effect.
4zAdjust
z Adjust the filter effect, then press <0>.
zz For the Miniature effect, press the <W>
<X> <Y> <Z> keys to move the white
frame indicating the area that looks
sharp, then press <0>.
291
Creative Filters
the image.
5zSave
z Select [OK].
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number displayed, then select [OK].
zz To apply filter processing to other
images, repeat steps 2–5.
zz For images captured in RAW+JPEG shooting, filter processing is applied to the
RAW image, and the results are saved as a JPEG.
zz For RAW images captured at a specific aspect ratio, the resulting image is
saved at that aspect ratio after filter processing.
Creative Filter Characteristics
zz I Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white effect.
zz G Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
zz X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this filter effect magnifies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
292
Creative Filters
zz J Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more threedimensional. By adjusting the effect, you can change the contrast and
saturation. Note that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not
be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have
significant noise.
zz K Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors.
By adjusting the effect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
zz H Toy camera effect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
zz c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks sharp.
To switch between vertical and horizontal orientation of the sharp area
(white frame), tap [T] at the bottom of the screen in step 4.
293
Creative Assist
You can process RAW images by applying your preferred effects and saving
as JPEGs.
1Select [3: Creative Assist].
an image.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to process, then press <0>.
an effect level.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the effect.
zz By selecting [Preset] and pressing
<0>, you can choose [VIVID],
[SOFT], or other preset effects.
[AUTO1], [AUTO2], and [AUTO3] are
effects recommended by the camera
based on image conditions.
294
Creative Assist
zz You can adjust effects such as
[Brightness] or [Contrast] by
pressing <0> and then using the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz Press <0> when adjustment is
finished.
zz To reset the effect, tap [Reset].
zz To confirm the effect, tap [Save] in the
upper right of the screen.
the image.
4zSave
z Select [OK].
zz For details on Creative Assist effects, see =78.
295
Red-Eye Correction
Automatically corrects portions of images affected by red-eye from flash.
1Select [3: Red-eye correction].
an image with <Y> <Z>.
2zSelect
z After image selection, either tap [E] or
press <0>.
zz White frames are displayed around
corrected image areas.
the image.
3zSave
z Select [OK].
zz The image is saved as a separate file.
zz Some images may not be corrected accurately.
296
Create Album
You can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in an album.
1Select [3: Create album].
an album to edit.
2zSelect
z Press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
zz After selection, press the <M>
button.
3Select [OK].
4Select an editing option.
297
Create Album
Option
Description
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to move,
T Rearrange video
then press <0>. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to move it, then
snapshots
press <0>.
L Remove video
snapshot
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to delete,
then press <0>. Selected video snapshots are labeled [L].
To clear the selection and remove [L], press <0> again.
7 Play video
snapshot
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to play, then
press <0>. Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the volume.
editing.
5zFinish
z Press the <M> button when you are
finished editing.
zz Select [W] (Finish editing).
the image.
6zSave
z To check your editing, select [Preview].
zz To play an album with background
music, use [Background music] to
select the music (=299).
zz Selecting [Save] saves the edited album
as a new album.
zz Video snapshot albums can only be edited once.
298
Create Album
Selection of Background Music
Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you
copy the music to the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).
[Background music].
1zSelect
z Set [Background music] to [On].
the background music.
2zSelect
z Use the <W> <X> keys to select the
music, then press <0>. For [Slide
show], you can select multiple tracks.
to a sample.
3zListen
z To listen to a sample, tap [7].
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the
volume. Tap [ ] to stop playback.
zz To delete the music, use the <W> <X>
keys to select it, then tap [Delete].
zz For instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
299
Cropping
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in RAW
cannot be cropped.
1Select [x: Cropping].
an image.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to crop.
the cropping frame.
3zSetz Press
<0> to display the cropping
frame.
zz The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
zz Changing the Cropping Frame Size
You can adjust the frame size by pinching in or out on the screen.
The smaller the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image
will look.
zz Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <V> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
300
Cropping
zz Correcting the Tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <6> dial to select [c],
then press <0>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <6>
dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments)
on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt
correction, press <0>.
zz Changing the Aspect Ratio and Orientation
Turn the <6> dial to select [e]. Press <0> to change the cropping
frame’s aspect ratio.
the image area to be
4Check
cropped.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select [b].
zz The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
the image.
5zSave
z Turn the <6> dial to select [W].
zz Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
zz To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
zz The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the
angle set for tilt correction.
zz Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
zz AF point display information (=314) will not be appended to the cropped
images.
301
Resizing
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as
a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a
images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.
1Select [3: Resize].
an image.
2zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to resize.
the desired image size.
3zSelect
z Press <0> to display the image sizes.
zz Select the desired image size (1).
(1)
the image.
4zSave
z Select [OK] to save the resized image.
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
zz To resize another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
zz For details on image sizes of resized images, see =500.
302
Rating
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (l/m/n/o/p). This function is
called rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.
Rating a Single Image
1Select [3: Rating].
2Select [Select images].
the image to be rated.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to rate.
the image.
4zRate
z Press <0>, and a blue highlight frame
will appear as shown in the screen
shown on the left.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating mark, then press <0>.
zz When you append a rating mark to the
image, the number beside the set rating
will increase by one.
zz To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
303
Rating
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1zSelect
z Select [Select range] in [3: Rating].
the range of images.
2zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
zz A checkmark [X] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
first and last images.
3Press the <M> button.
the image.
4zRate
z Turn the <6> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
zz All the images in the specified range will
be rated (same rating) at once.
304
Rating
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [3: Rating], when you select [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be rated.
Turn the <6> dial to select a rating,
then select [OK].
When you are not rating images or
cancelling the rating, select [OFF].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=308), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be rated as specified.
zz Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have
that rating.
zz With [3: Set image search conditions] and [3: Image jump with i],
you can display only the images given a specific rating.
305
Slide Shows
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
the images to be played back.
1 zSpecify
z To play back all the images on the card,
go to step 2.
zz If you want to specify the images to be
played back in the slide show, filter the
images with [3: Set image search
conditions] (=308).
2Select [3: Slide show].
the playback as desired.
3zSetz Select
[Set up].
zz Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), and [Transition
effect] (effect when changing images)
for the still photos.
zz To play background music, use
[Background music] to select the
music (=299).
zz After completing the settings, press the
<M> button.
306
Slide Shows
Display time
Repeat
Transition effect
Background music
the slide show.
4zStart
z Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5zExit
z To exit the slide show and return
to the setting screen, press the
<M> button.
zz To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed on
the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.
zz Volume during movie playback can be adjusted by pressing the <W> <X> keys.
zz During auto playback or pause, you can press the <Y> <Z> keys to view
another image.
zz During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
zz The display time may differ depending on the image.
307
Set Image Search Conditions
You can filter image display according to your search conditions.
After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display
only the found images.
You can also protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other
operations to filtered images.
[3: Set image search
1Select
conditions].
conditions.
2zSetz Usethethesearch
<W> <X> keys to select an item.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to set the setting.
A checkmark [X] (1) is appended to the
left of the item. (Specified as the search
condition.)
zz If you select the item and press <0>,
the checkmark [X] will be removed.
(The search condition is canceled.)
zz To clear all specified search conditions,
tap [Clear].
(1)
Item
9Rating
Description
Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
dDate
Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
nFolder
Displays images in the selected folder.
JProtect
Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
fType of file
Displays images in the selected file type.
308
Set Image Search Conditions
the search conditions.
3zApply
z Press the <M> button and read the
message displayed.
zz Select [OK].
zz The search condition is specified.
the found images.
4zDisplay
z Press the <3> button.
(2)
zz Only the images that match the set
conditions (filtered) will be played back.
zz When the images are filtered for display,
the screen will have an outer yellow
frame (2).
309
Image Jump by Swiping
In single-image display, you can swipe left or right with two fingers to jump
forward or back through images according to the jump method set.
1Select [x: Image jump with i].
2Select the jump method.
zz With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the <6> dial to
select the number of images to jump by.
zz When you select [Display by image rating], turn the <6> dial to specify the
rating (=303). If you browse images with 9 selected, all the rated images
will be displayed.
310
Image Jump by Swiping
by jumping.
3zBrowse
z Press the <x> button.
zz In single-image display, swipe left or
right with two fingers.
zz You can browse by the set method.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Jump method
Playback position
zz To search images by shooting date, select [g: Date].
zz To search images by folder, select [h: Folder].
zz If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or
[j: Stills] to display one or the other.
311
Playback Information Display
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during
image playback.
[3: Playback information
1Select
display].
a checkmark [X] next to the
2Add
number of screens to display.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select a
number.
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
zz Repeat these steps to add a checkmark
[X] to the number of each screen to
display, then select [OK].
zz Your selected information can be
accessed by pressing the <B>
button during playback.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the
exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for
checking the color saturation and gradation.
312
Playback Information Display
zz [Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level.
The horizontal axis indicates the brightness
level (darker on the left and brighter on the right)
while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels
exist for each brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker the image.
The more pixels there are toward the right, the
brighter the image. If there are too many pixels
on the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there
are too many pixels on the right, the highlight
detail will be lost. The gradation in-between will
be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure
level inclination and the overall gradation.
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
zz [RGB] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the
left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels
there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there
are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be
lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too
saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,
you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as
white balance inclination.
313
AF Point Display
You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined
in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple
AF points may be displayed.
1Select [3: AF point disp.].
2Select [Enable].
314
View from Last Seen
You can specify which image is displayed first when you start image
playback.
1Select [3: View from last seen].
an item.
2zSelect
z [Enable]: Playback resumes from the
last image displayed (except when you
have just finished shooting).
zz [Disable]: Playback resumes from your
most recent shot whenever the camera
is restarted.
315
316
Wireless Settings
This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a
smartphone wirelessly via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi® and send images
to devices or Web services, how to control the camera from a
computer or wireless remote control, and other operations.
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage
from erroneous wireless communication settings when using the
camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other
loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish
appropriate security at your own risk and discretion. Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by
unauthorized access or other security breaches.
317
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings
zz Wireless settings 1
=319
=401
=393
=394
=395
=396
zz Wireless settings 2
=402
zz Wireless communication is not available while the camera is connected via an
interface cable to a computer or other device.
zz Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to
devices via Wi-Fi.
zz The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera
(except for [D]). Also, for [l] and Web services, the camera cannot be
connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
zz The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you turn off the camera, or open the
card slot cover or battery compartment cover.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power off does not
function.
318
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
an item for the camera to
2Select
connect to.
q Connect to smartphone (=321)
Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi‑Fi
connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or
tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in this manual).
D Use with EOS software or other dedicated software (=349)
Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera
remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated application
Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the camera can also be sent to a
computer automatically.
l Print from Wi-Fi printer (=357)
Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via
Wi-Fi to print images.
319
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
R Upload to Web service (=367)
Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after you complete
member registration (free of charge).
K Connect to Wireless Remote (=387)
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
320
Connecting to a Smartphone
You can do the following after pairing the camera with a smartphone
compatible with Bluetooth low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”).
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone (=323).
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off (=328).
zz Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone (=396).
zz Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (=327).
You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone
via Wi-Fi.
zz Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone (=327).
zz Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (=327).
zz Send images to a smartphone from the camera (=336).
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that
pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
zz To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi‑Fi Connection via
Access Points” (=382).
321
Connecting to a Smartphone
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone
The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on
the smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed.
zz Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
zz Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google
Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear
when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
zz For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
zz Sample screens and other details in this guide may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera firmware updates or updates to Camera
Connect, Android, or iOS.
322
Connecting to a Smartphone
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (1)
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
2Select [qConnect to smartphone].
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
an item.
4zSelect
z If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
zz If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone
to access Google Play or App Store and
install Camera Connect.
323
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Pair via Bluetooth].
5zSelect
z Pairing now begins.
zz To pair with a different smartphone after
pairing with one initially, select [OK] on
the screen at left.
Steps on the Smartphone (1)
6Start Camera Connect.
the camera for pairing.
7zTapz If you
are using an Android smartphone,
go to step 9.
8Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
324
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Camera (2)
9Select [OK].
<0>.
10 zPress
z Pairing is now complete, and the camera
is connected to the smartphone via
Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth icon appears on the main
Camera Connect screen.
zz The camera cannot be connected to two or more smartphones at the same time
via Bluetooth. To switch to a different smartphone for the Bluetooth connection,
see =399.
zz Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s auto
power off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use
the camera.
Troubleshooting Pairing
zz Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
zz With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send
images to the smartphone (=336).
325
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone (2)
Connect function.
11 zTapz In oniOS,a tapCamera
[Join] when a message is
displayed to confirm camera connection.
zz For the Camera Connect functions,
see =327.
zz When a Wi-Fi connection is established,
the screen for the selected function will
appear.
zz [qWi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera.
zz The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on
the main Camera Connect screen.
The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now
complete.
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (=344).
zz Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth
connection.
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, start Camera Connect and tap the function you
will use.
326
Connecting to a Smartphone
[qWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of
the error.
Camera Connect Functions
Images on camera
zz Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.
zz Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Remote live view shooting
zz Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.
Auto transfer
zz Enables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a
smartphone automatically as they are captured (=335).
Bluetooth remote controller
zz Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
zz Auto power off is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote
controller feature.
Location information
zz Not supported on this camera.
Camera settings
zz Camera settings can be changed.
327
Connecting to a Smartphone
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Even when the camera is off, as long as it is paired to a smartphone via
Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi.
zz Even if the camera is off, tapping
[Images on camera] in the Camera
Connect menu starts a Wi-Fi connection.
zz In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is
displayed to confirm camera connection.
Images on the camera are listed when
the Wi-Fi connection is established.
zz You can use Camera Connect to save images to the smartphone, and
you can delete images on the camera.
zz To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [ ] on the main Camera
Connect screen (=344).
zz This function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the
smartphone connection information is erased.
328
Connecting to a Smartphone
Canceling the Pairing
Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[qConnect to smartphone].
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Edit/delete device].
the smartphone to cancel
4Select
paring with.
zz Smartphones currently paired with the
camera are labeled [s].
329
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Delete connection
5Select
information].
6Select [OK].
the camera information on
7Clear
the smartphone.
zz In the smartphone’s Bluetooth setting
menu, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
330
Connecting to a Smartphone
Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth
Steps on the Camera (1)
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[qConnect to smartphone].
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
an item.
4zSelect
z If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
331
Connecting to a Smartphone
5Select [Connect via Wi-Fi].
(1)
the SSID (network name)
6Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (=393).
(2)
zz By selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection
via an access point (=382).
332
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone
Smartphone’s screen
(sample)
the smartphone to
7Operate
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
zz Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
function, then tap the SSID (network
name) checked in step 6.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
Camera Connect and tap the
8Start
camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.
Steps on the Camera (2)
[OK].
9zSelect
z To specify viewable images, press the
<B> button. See step 5 on =346
to set them.
333
Connecting to a Smartphone
zz The main window of Camera Connect
will be displayed on the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is
now complete.
zz Operate the camera using Camera
Connect (=327).
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (=344).
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=390).
zz When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the
Quick Control screen during playback (=336).
334
Connecting to a Smartphone
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot
Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following these
steps, make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.
1Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
[Send to smartphone after
2Select
shot].
3In [Auto send], select [Enable].
4Set [Size to send].
5Take the picture.
335
Connecting to a Smartphone
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
1Play back the image.
2Press the <Q> button.
[qSend images to
3Select
smartphone].
zz If you perform this step while connected
via Bluetooth, a message is displayed,
and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi
connection.
sending options and send
4Select
the images.
336
Connecting to a Smartphone
(1) Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to send, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
[Send img shown].
2zSelect
z In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
zz When sending movies, you can select
the image quality of movies to send in
[Quality to send].
(2) Sending Multiple Selected Images
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send selected].
337
Connecting to a Smartphone
images to send.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to send, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
zz After selecting the images to send, press
the <M> button.
image selection.
4zExit
z Select [OK].
[Size to send].
5zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
6Select [Send].
338
Connecting to a Smartphone
(3) Sending a Specified Range of Images
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send range].
the range of images.
3zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Select the last image (end point).
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
zz You can turn the <6> dial to change
the number of images shown in the
index display.
the range.
4zConfirm
z Press <0>.
image selection.
5zExit
z Press the <M> button, then
press [OK].
339
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Size to send].
6zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
7Select [Send].
340
Connecting to a Smartphone
(4) Sending All Images on the Card
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send all card].
[Size to send].
3zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4Select [Send].
341
Connecting to a Smartphone
(5) Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(=308).
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4Select [Send].
342
Connecting to a Smartphone
Ending Image Transfer
Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android)
zz Press the <M> button on the image
transfer screen.
zz Select [OK] on the screen on the left
to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi
connection.
Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection
zz Press the <M> button on the image
transfer screen.
zz For instructions on disconnecting
from Wi-Fi, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (=344).
343
Connecting to a Smartphone
zz During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the
camera’s shutter button is pressed.
zz You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
zz You can select up to 999 files at a time.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
zz Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that
time. Note that b size still photos are not reduced.
zz Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time.
zz When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
Terminating Wi-Fi Connections
Perform either of the following operations.
On the Camera Connect screen,
tap on [ ].
On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select
[Disconnect,exit].
zz If the [qWi-Fi on] screen is not
displayed, select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
zz Select [Disconnect,exit], then select
[OK] on the confirmation dialog.
344
Connecting to a Smartphone
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones
Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[qConnect to smartphone].
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Edit/delete device].
a smartphone.
4zSelect
z Select the name of the smartphone on
which you want to make the images
viewable.
345
Connecting to a Smartphone
5Select [Viewable imgs].
an item.
6zSelect
z Select [OK] to access the setting
screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the shootingdate basis. Images shot up to nine days
ago can be specified.
zz When [Images shot in past days] is
selected, images shot up to the specified
number of days before the current date
become viewable. Use the <W> <X>
keys to specify the number of days, then
press <0> to confirm the selection.
zz Once you select [OK], the viewable
images are set.
zz If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote
shooting is not possible.
346
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on
whether a rating is appended (or not
appended) or by the type of rating.
zz Once you select the type of rating,
the viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
(1)
(2)
Select the first and last images from images
arranged by the file number to specify the
viewable images.
1. Press <0> to display the image
selection screen.
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image.
You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2. Select an image as the starting point (1).
3. Use <Z> to select an image as the
ending point (2).
4. Select [OK].
347
Connecting to a Smartphone
zz If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
yyShooting mode switch set to <k>: movie recording continues.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
zz In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
zz Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
zz When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you
press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn off.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
348
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi‑Fi
and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated
software. Install the latest version of software on the computer before
setting up a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera,
control the camera, and perform other operations.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[DRemote control
2Select
(EOS Utility)].
zz If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
349
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
(1)
the SSID (network name)
4Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required. For details,
see =393.
(2)
Steps on the Computer (1)
Computer’s screen (sample)
the SSID, then enter the
5Select
password.
zz On the computer’s network setting
screen, select the SSID checked in
step 4.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
350
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
[OK].
6zSelect
z The following message is displayed.
“******” represents the last six digits of
the MAC address of the camera to be
connected.
Steps on the Computer (2)
7Start EOS Utility.
EOS Utility, click [Pairing over
8InWi-Fi/LAN].
zz If a firewall-related message is
displayed, select [Yes].
[Connect].
9zClick
z Select the camera to connect to,
then click [Connect].
351
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (3)
a Wi-Fi connection.
10 zEstablish
z Select [OK].
[DWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs,
you can check the details of the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.
zz Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=390).
352
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
zz If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
yyShooting mode switch set to <k>: movie recording continues.
yyShooting mode switch not set to <k>: movie recording stops.
zz Shooting operations using the camera are not possible after you use
EOS Utility to switch from still photo mode to movie mode.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
zz In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
zz Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
zz In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower
compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects
cannot be displayed smoothly.
353
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images on the Camera Automatically
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images
on the camera to a computer automatically.
Steps on the Computer (1)
the computer and access
1Connect
point and start Image Transfer
Utility 2.
zz The screen to set up pairing is shown
when you follow the instructions
displayed the first time Image Transfer
Utility 2 starts up.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[Auto send images to
2Select
computer].
zz Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
zz Select [Auto send images to
computer].
3In [Auto send], select [Enable].
354
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
4Select [OK].
to an access point via
5Connect
Wi-Fi.
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection
between the camera and the access
point connected to the computer.
For connection instructions, see
“Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points”
(=382).
the computer to pair the
6Select
camera with.
Steps on the Computer (2)
the camera and computer.
7zPair
z Select the camera, then click [Pairing].
355
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
[Auto send images to
8Select
computer].
zz Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
zz Select [Auto send images to
computer].
9Select [Image sending options].
what to send.
10 zSelect
z If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range
to send], specify the images to send on
the [Select images to send] screen.
zz After the settings are complete, turn the
camera off.
Images on the camera are automatically sent to the active computer when
you turn the camera on within range of the access point.
zz If images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.
356
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the
camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via Wi-Fi.
For printer operating instructions, refer to the printer user manual.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer].
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
357
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
(1)
the SSID (network name)
4Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (=393).
(2)
5zSetz OnupthetheWi-Fiprinter.
settings menu of the printer
to be used, select the SSID you have
checked.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
the printer.
6zSelect
z In the list of detected printers, select the
printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
zz If your preferred printer is not listed,
selecting [Search again] may enable
the camera to find and display it.
zz To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi‑Fi Connection via
Access Points” (=382).
358
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Image Printing
Printing Images Individually
the image to be printed.
1zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to print, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2Select [Print image].
the image.
3zPrint
z For the print setting procedures, see
=362.
zz Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.
359
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing According to Specified Image Options
1Press <0>.
2Select [Print order].
options.
3zSetz Forthetheprinting
print setting procedures, see
“Print Ordering” (=284).
zz If the print order is complete before
establishing a Wi-Fi connection,
go to step 4.
[Print].
4zSelect
z [Print] can be selected only when an
image is selected and the printer is
ready to print.
5Set the [Paper settings] (=362).
360
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
the image.
6zPrint
z When [OK] is selected, printing starts.
zz Shooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.
zz Movies cannot be printed.
zz Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
zz Certain printers may not be able to imprint the file number.
zz If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
zz Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright
background or on the border.
zz RAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing,
select [Print image] and print.
zz When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
zz Depending on the image’s file size and image quality, it may take some time to
start printing after you select [Print].
zz To stop printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].
zz When printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume
printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not
resume if any of the following occurs.
yyYou change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before
resuming printing.
zz If a problem occurs during printing, see =366.
361
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Print Settings
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.
Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Print setting screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(7)
Sets date or file number printing (=364).
Sets the printing effects (=364).
Sets the number of copies to print (=364).
Sets the print area (=365).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout (=363).
Returns to the image selection screen.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.
362
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Paper Settings
zz Select [Paper settings].
[Q] Setting the Paper Size
zz Select the size of the paper in the
printer.
[Y] Setting the Paper Type
zz Select the type of the paper in the
printer.
[U] Setting the Page Layout
zz Select the page layout.
zz If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print.
Images may also be printed at lower resolution.
363
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
[I] Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting
zz Select [I].
zz Select what to print.
[E] Setting the Printing Effects (Image Optimization)
zz Select [E].
zz Select printing effects.
zz If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed
(H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
zz The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s
own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s
instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.
[R] Setting the Number of Copies
zz Select [R].
zz Select the number of copies to print.
364
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Cropping the Image
Set cropping immediately before
printing. Changing other print settings after
you crop images may require you to crop
the images again.
1On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
2zSetz Thetheimage
area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape
of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
You can adjust the frame size by pinching in or out on the screen.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use the <V> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame
Tap [T] on the screen to switch the cropping frame between vertical
and horizontal orientation.
<0> to exit the cropping.
3zPress
z You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print
setting screen.
365
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
zz Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you
specified.
zz The smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are
printed.
Handling Printer Errors
zz If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on
resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Error Messages
zz If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the camera
screen. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a
printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
zz Confirm that paper is loaded correctly.
Ink Error
zz Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
zz Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
zz The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a different camera or
images edited with a computer may not be printable.
366
Sending Images to a Web Service
This section describes how to use Web services to send images.
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
zz A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions of
browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings required for
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.
zz For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/cig/).
zz For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to
the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
zz If you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend to
use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you
will register.
zz Fees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access your
provider’s access point are charged separately.
367
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
2Select [RUpload to Web service].
3Select [I Agree].
a Wi-Fi connection.
4zEstablish
z Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.
Go to step 7 on =383.
368
Sending Images to a Web Service
your email address.
5zEnter
z Enter your email address, then
select [OK].
a four-digit number.
6zEnter
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
then select [OK].
[OK].
7zSelect
z The [R] icon changes to [
].
369
Sending Images to a Web Service
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
up camera web link.
8zSetz Access
the page in the notification
message.
zz Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera web link settings
page.
Steps on the Camera (2)
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a
9Add
destination.
zz Select [ ].
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now
added.
370
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering Other Web Services
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
the Web service you
1Configure
want to use.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
website and access the camera web link
settings page.
zz Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
Steps on the Camera
the Web service you
2Add
configured as a destination.
zz Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
zz Select [ ].
371
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images
You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from
the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web
links of the online albums.
Connecting to Web Services via Wi-Fi
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
a Web service.
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz A screen to select a destination may be
displayed, depending on the type and
settings of the Web service (=385).
372
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to send, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
[Send img shown].
2zSelect
z In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the
<W> <X> keys.
373
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send selected].
images to send.
3zSelect
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to send, then press <0>.
zz You can turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to switch to threeimage display for image selection.
To return to single-image display, turn
the <6> dial clockwise.
zz After selecting the images to send, press
the <M> button.
374
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
4zSelect
z When YouTube is selected as the
destination, [Size to send] is not
displayed.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
5zSelect
z On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the
<W> <X> keys.
375
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending a Specified Range of Images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send range].
the range of images.
3zSpecify
z Select the first image (start point).
zz Select the last image (end point).
Images will be selected and [X] will
appear.
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
zz You can turn the <6> dial to change
the number of images shown in the
index display.
the range.
4zConfirm
z Press the <M> button.
376
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
5zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
6zSelect
z On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the
<W> <X> keys.
377
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending All Images on the Card
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send all card].
[Size to send].
3zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
4zSelect
z On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the
<W> <X> keys.
378
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(=308).
1Press <0>.
2Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3zSelect
z On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
379
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Send].
4zSelect
z On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the
<W> <X> keys.
380
Sending Images to a Web Service
zz With a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be
taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
zz When sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has
not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be
checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then
try sending the image again.
zz Depending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can be sent
and the length of movies will be limited.
zz Certain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all card],
or [Send all found].
zz When you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are
resized. Note that movies or b size still photos are not reduced.
zz [Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same model
as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without resizing.
zz When accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you can check the send history
for the Web services that the images were sent to.
zz When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
381
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points
This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point
compatible with WPS (PBC mode).
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
an item.
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
zz When [qConnect to smartphone]
is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed. If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
zz On the [Connect to smartphone]
screen displayed next, select [Connect
via Wi-Fi].
382
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points
[Switch network].
4zSelect
z Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected.
5Select [Connect with WPS].
zz For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 5, see =385.
[WPS (PBC mode)].
6zSelect
z Select [OK].
to the access point via
7Connect
Wi-Fi.
zz Press the access point’s WPS button.
zz Select [OK].
383
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points
[Auto setting].
8zSelect
z Select [OK] to access the setting screen
for the Wi-Fi function.
zz If an error occurs with [Auto setting],
see =385.
the settings for the Wi-Fi
9Specify
function.
[qConnect to smartphone]
zz On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen,
tap the SSID (network name) shown on
the camera, then enter the password of
the access point for the connection.
Go to step 8 on =333.
[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]
Go to step 7 or 8 on =351.
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]
Go to step 6 on =358.
Registering CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Go to step 5 on =369.
384
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points
Send To Screen
A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web
service.
To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer.
For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
zz The [Send to] screen may be displayed.
zz Select the destination from the list of
registered destinations.
zz The procedures for setting up a
connection and sending images are the
same as those for other Web services.
Camera Access Point Mode
Camera access point mode is a connection
mode for connecting the camera directly to
each device via Wi-Fi.
Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected in [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].
Manual IP Address Setup
The items displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function.
[Manual setting].
1zSelect
z Select [OK].
385
Wi‑Fi Connection via Access Points
an item.
2zSelect
z Select an item to access the screen for
numerical input.
zz To use a gateway, select [Enable], then
select [Address].
the desired values.
3zEnter
z Turn the <6> dial to move the input
position in the upper area and use the
<Y> <Z> keys to select the number.
Press <0> to enter the selected
number.
zz Press the <M> button to delete a
character.
[OK].
4zSelect
z When you have completed setting the
necessary items, select [OK].
zz If you are not sure what to enter, see
“Checking Network Settings” (=419),
or ask the network administrator or
another person knowledgeable about
the network.
386
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (=191).
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[KConnect to Wireless
2Select
Remote].
3Select [Add a device to connect to].
the devices.
4zPair
z When the [Pairing] screen appears,
press and hold the <W> and <T>
buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for
at least 3 sec.
zz After a message confirms that the
camera is paired with the BR-E1,
press <0>.
387
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Still Photo Shooting
up the camera for remote
5Set
shooting.
zz Set [Drive mode] on the [z] tab to [Q]
(=135).
Movie Recording
zz In [Remote control] on the [z] tab,
select [Enable].
zz For instructions after the pairing
is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s
Instruction Manual.
zz Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto
power off is activated.
zz When you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting [Bluetooth settings] to
[Disable] in step 1 is recommended.
388
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the
connected remote control.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
[KConnect to Wireless
2Select
Remote].
[Delete connection
3Select
information].
4Select [OK].
389
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered
connection settings.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
an item.
2zSelect
z Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi
from the displayed history. If the item is
not displayed, use the <Y> <Z> keys
to switch screens.
zz If [Connection history] is set to
[Hide], the history will not be displayed
(=393).
the connected device.
3Operate
[q] Smartphone
zz Start Camera Connect.
zz If the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same
access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
390
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
[D] Computer
zz On the computer, start the EOS software.
zz If the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore
the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access
point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
[l] Printer
zz If the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the
setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point
as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
391
Registering Multiple Connection Settings
You can register up to 10 connection settings for the wireless communication
functions.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
an item.
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
zz For details on [qConnect to
smartphone], see “Connecting to a
Smartphone” (=321).
zz For details on [DRemote control (EOS
Utility)], see “Connecting to a Computer
via Wi-Fi” (=349).
zz For details on [lPrint from Wi-Fi
printer], see “Connecting to a Printer
via Wi-Fi” (=357).
zz When sending images to a Web service,
see “Sending Images to a Web Service”
(=367).
zz To delete connection settings, see =399.
392
Wi-Fi Settings
1Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
2Select an item.
zz Wi-Fi
When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited,
such as on board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable] or [Airplane
mode] (=401).
zz Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a
password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
zz Connection history
You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide] the history of the Wi-Fi
connected devices.
zz Auto send images to computer
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send
images on the camera to a computer automatically (=354).
zz Send to smartphone after shot
Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically (=335).
zz MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the camera.
393
Bluetooth Settings
1Select [k: Bluetooth settings].
2Select an item.
zz Bluetooth
If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable].
zz Check connection information
You can check the name and communication status of the paired device.
zz Bluetooth address
You can check the camera’s Bluetooth address.
394
Changing the Nickname
You can change the camera nickname (displayed on smartphones and
other cameras) as needed.
1Select [k: Nickname].
text using the virtual
2Enter
keyboard (=404).
zz When you finish entering characters,
press the <M> button.
395
Geotagging Images with GPS Information
from Other Devices
You can geotag images with a Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
Complete these settings after installing the dedicated Camera Connect app
(=322) on the smartphone.
the smartphone, activate
1On
location services.
a Bluetooth connection.
2zEstablish
z Connect the camera to a smartphone
via Bluetooth (=323).
3Select [k: GPS settings].
4Select [GPS via mobile].
5Select [Enable].
the picture.
6zTake
z Images are geotagged with the
information from the smartphone.
396
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
GPS Connection Display
You can check the status of acquiring location information from a
smartphone by referring to [GPS] display on screens for still photo shooting
or movie recording (=501 and =503, respectively).
zz Gray: Location services are off
zz Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
zz On: Location information acquired
Geotagging images as you shoot
Images captured while [GPS] is on are geotagged.
Geotagging information
You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting
information screen (=256, =312).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
397
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
zz The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the
camera via Bluetooth.
zz Direction information is not acquired.
zz Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
zz It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after
you turn the camera on.
zz Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
yyPairing with a wireless remote control via Bluetooth
yyTurning the camera off
yyQuitting Camera Connect
yyDeactivating location services on the smartphone
zz Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
yyThe camera power turns off
yyThe Bluetooth connection is ended
yyThe smartphone’s remaining battery level is low
zz Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
zz For movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.
398
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection
first.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
an item.
2zSelect
z If the history (=390) is displayed,
switch the screen with the
<Y> <Z> keys.
[Edit/delete device].
3zSelect
z You can change the Bluetooth
connection by selecting a smartphone
labeled with [s] in gray. After the
[Connect to smartphone] screen is
displayed, select [Pair via Bluetooth],
then press <0> on the next screen.
the device for which to
4Select
change or delete the connection
settings.
399
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
an item.
5zSelect
z Change or delete the connection
settings on the displayed screen.
zz Change device nickname
You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (=404).
zz Viewable imgs (=345)
Displayed when [qConnect to smartphone] is selected. Settings will
appear at the bottom of the screen.
zz Delete connection information
When deleting connection information for a paired smartphone, also
delete the camera information registered on the smartphone (=329).
zz For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to delete the
connection settings.
400
Airplane Mode
You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions.
1Select [k: Airplane mode].
2zSetz [ to] is[On].
displayed.
401
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings
to Default
All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless
communication settings, you can prevent their information from being
exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people.
1Select [k: Clear wireless settings].
2Select [OK].
zz Information in wireless communication settings is retained even if you select
[Basic settings] in [5: Reset camera].
zz If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone’s
Bluetooth settings screen, delete the connection information of the camera for
which you restored default wireless communication settings.
402
View Info Screen
You can check error details and the camera’s MAC address.
[k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
1Select
connection].
info].
2zTapz The[View
[View info] screen will appear.
zz When an error has occurred, press <0> to display the error content.
403
Virtual Keyboard Operations
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
Input area, for entering text
Cursor keys, for moving in the
input area
Current no. of characters/no.
available
Keyboard
(7)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(8)
Switch input modes
Space
Delete a character in the input
area
Finish the text entry
zz To move the cursor within (1), turn the <6> dial.
zz To move within (2) and (4)–(7), use the <V> cross keys.
zz Press <0> to confirm input or when switching input modes.
404
Responding to Error Messages
When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the
procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the
examples shown in this chapter.
zz On the [View info] screen, press <0> (=403).
zz Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.
Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the
corresponding page.
11 (=406)
12 (=406)
21 (=407)
23 (=409)
61 (=410)
63 (=411)
22 (=408)
64 (=411)
65 (=412)
66 (=412)
67 (=412)
68 (=413)
69 (=413)
91 (=413)
121 (=413)
125 (=414)
126 (=414)
127 (=414)
141 (=414)
142 (=414)
151 (=415)
152 (=415)
zz When an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth connection] screen. It is no longer displayed after the camera is
turned off.
405
Responding to Error Messages
11: Connection target not found
zz In the case of [q], is Camera Connect running?
BBEstablish a connection using Camera Connect (=333).
zz In the case of [D], is the EOS software running?
BBStart the EOS software and reestablish the connection (=351).
zz In the case of [l], is the power of the printer on?
BBTurn on the printer.
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
BBThis error occurs if the passwords do not match when the
authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera (=404).
12: Connection target not found
zz Is the power of the target device and access point on?
BBTurn on the target device and access point, then wait a while.
If a connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to
establish the connection again.
406
Responding to Error Messages
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct
setting?
BBIf no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP
address to [Manual setting] on the camera (=385).
What to check on the DHCP server
zz Is the power of the DHCP server on?
BBTurn on the DHCP server.
zz Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
BBIncrease the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
BBRemove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the
network to reduce the number of addresses in use.
zz Is the DHCP server working correctly?
BBCheck the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DHCP server.
BBIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP
server is available.
407
Responding to Error Messages
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the
server’s actual address?
BBSet the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set
the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used
(=385, =419).
What to check on the DNS server
zz Is the power of the DNS server on?
BBTurn on the DNS server.
zz Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding
names correct?
BBOn the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding
names are entered correctly.
zz Is the DNS server working correctly?
BBCheck the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DNS server.
BBIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS
server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
zz Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a
router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
BBIf applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway
address and enter it on the camera (=419, =385).
BBMake sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on
all network devices including the camera.
408
Responding to Error Messages
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
What to check on the camera
zz Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same
network have the same IP address?
BBChange the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address
as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address
of the device that has a duplicate address.
BBIf the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network
environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to
[Auto setting] (=384).
Responding to Error Messages 21–23
zz Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
yyThis error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is case-sensitive,
so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the correct
password for authentication is set on the camera (=404).
409
Responding to Error Messages
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
BBMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (=416).
What to check on the camera
zz Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
BBCheck the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on
the camera.
What to check at the access point
zz Is the access point turned on?
BBTurn on the power of the access point.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
BBRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=403).
410
Responding to Error Messages
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication
method?
BBThe camera supports the following authentication methods:
[Open system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
BBThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
BBRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=403).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
BBThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
BBRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=403).
411
Responding to Error Messages
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
BBMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (=416).
zz The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
BBThe following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access
point from another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in
use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or
influence of rain or high humidity (=416).
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
BBThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
BBThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
BBRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=403).
412
Responding to Error Messages
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the
beginning.
zz Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
button for the specified period of time?
BBHold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the
access point’s instruction manual.
zz Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point?
BBTry establishing the connection when both devices are within reach
of each other.
69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot
connect. Retry from the beginning.
zz Connection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton
Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
BBWait a while before trying to establish the connection.
91: Other error
zz A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.
BBTurn the camera’s power switch off and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
zz The target Web server does not have enough free space.
BBDelete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space
on the Web server, then try sending the data again.
413
Responding to Error Messages
125: Check the network settings
zz Is the network connected?
BBCheck the connection status of the network.
126: Could not connect to server
zz CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated
temporarily.
BBTry connecting to the Web service again later.
127: An error has occurred
zz A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the
camera is connected to the Web service.
BBTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
141: Printer is busy. Try connecting again.
zz Is the printer performing a printing process?
BBTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
printing process is finished.
zz Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?
BBTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
Wi‑Fi connection to the other camera has been terminated.
142: C ould not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try
again.
zz Is the power of the printer on?
BBTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the printer.
414
Responding to Error Messages
151: Transmission canceled
zz Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.
BBRestart the camera to resume automatic image transfer.
152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock
zz Is the card’s write protect switch set to the locked position?
BBSlide the card’s write protect switch to the writing position.
415
Wireless Communication Function Notes
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems
occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following
corrective actions.
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not
be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case,
bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi‑Fi
connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
zz When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using
the camera.
zz Install the device where people or objects do not come between the
device and the camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the influence of the following
electronic devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices
to transmit communication.
zz The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio
waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission
rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar
devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
416
Wireless Communication Function Notes
Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras
zz When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi,
make sure the cameras’ IP addresses are different.
zz When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi,
the transmission rate drops.
zz When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points,
leave a gap of five channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio
wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2
and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
zz BR-E1 cannot be used while the camera and smartphone are paired via
Bluetooth. Change the camera connection to the wireless remote control
in [KConnect to Wireless Remote] under [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
417
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems
may occur.
zz Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
zz Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly
secure your network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.
418
Checking Network Settings
zz Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipconfig/all and press
the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.
zz Mac OS
In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and
press the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the computer is
indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on
the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP address
assigned to the camera in the processes described on =385.
Example: 192.168.1.10
419
Wireless Communication Status
Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.
Information display screen
during shooting
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
420
(2)
Wi-Fi function
Bluetooth function
Wireless signal strength
Information display screen
during playback
(1)
(3)
(2)
Wireless Communication Status
Communication Status
Screen
Wi-Fi Function
Wi-Fi: Disable
Not
connected Wi-Fi: Enable
Wireless Signal Strength
Off
Connecting
(Blinking)
Connected
Sending data
(Animated)
Connection error
(Blinking)
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth Function
[Enable]
[Disable]
Connection Status
Screen
Bluetooth connected
s
Bluetooth not connected
s
Bluetooth not connected
Not displayed
zz “Bluetooth not connected” status is indicated when connected to computers,
printers, or Web services via Wi-Fi.
421
422
Function Settings
This chapter describes menu settings on the function settings ([5])
tab.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is
available only in advanced shooting modes ([d], [s], [f],
or [a]) or [k] movie modes ([k] or [M]).
423
Tab Menus: Function Settings
zz Function settings 1
=426
=428
=431
=432
=433
zz Function settings 2
=435
=436
=437
=438
=441
=442
zz Function settings 3
=443
=444
=445
=446
=447
=448
424
Tab Menus: Function Settings
zz Function settings 4
=449
=451
=452
zz Function settings 5
=458
=453
=454
=456
=456
=456
425
Select Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are
to be saved.
Creating a Folder
1Select [5: Select folder].
2Select [Create folder].
3Select [OK].
426
Select Folder
Selecting a Folder
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
zz Select a folder on the folder selection
screen.
zz Captured images are stored in your
selected folder.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Number of images in folder
Lowest file number
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
zz A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created
automatically. Also, if manual reset (=430) is executed, a new folder will be
created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
zz With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”.
Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”.
The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last five
characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to
Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that
two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for example,
“100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining five characters in each
name are different.
427
File Numbering
The captured images saved in a folder are
assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999.
You can change how the image files are
numbered.
(Example) IMG_0001.JPG
File number
1Select [5: File numbering].
the item.
2zSetz Select
[Numbering].
zz Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
zz If you want to reset the file numbering,
select [Manual reset] (=430).
zz Select [OK] to create a new folder, and
the file number will start with 0001.
zz If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even
if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message telling
you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
428
File Numbering
Continuous
When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even
after the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering
continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in
multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you use a newlyformatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0052
101
0051
0052
(1)
(1)
Next sequential file number
429
File Numbering
Auto Reset
When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each
time the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize
images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0001
101
0051
0001
(1)
(1)
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
When you wish to reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start
from file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts
from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
430
Auto Rotate
You can change the auto rotation setting that
straightens images shot in vertical orientation when
they are displayed.
1Select [5: Auto rotate].
2Select an item.
zz OnzD
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
zz OnD
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
zz Off
zz Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback
even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
zz If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, auto rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
zz If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
431
Adding Orientation Information to Movies
For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information
indicating which side is up can be added automatically to enable playback
in the same orientation on smartphones or other devices.
1Select [5: Add k rotate info].
2Select an item.
zz Enable
Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in which
they were recorded.
zz Disable
Play movies horizontally on smartphones or other devices, regardless of
the recording orientation.
zz Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [5: Add k
rotate info] setting.
432
Format Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera.
zz When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a
computer, etc. before formatting the card.
1Select [5: Format card].
the card.
2zFormat
z Select [OK].
zz For low-level formatting, press the
<B> button to add a checkmark <X>
to [Low level format], then select [OK].
zz The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
zz This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
433
Format Card
Format the Card in the Following Cases:
zz The card is new.
zz The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
zz The card is full of images or data.
zz A card-related error is displayed (=493).
Low-Level Formatting
zz Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
zz Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
zz During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting
[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be complete
and you can use the card as usual.
Card’s File Formats
zz SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
zz When recording a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie will
be recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple files) even
if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
zz It may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other
cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some
computer operating systems or card readers.
zz Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data.
Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of
cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
434
Eco Mode
You can conserve battery power while the shooting screen is displayed.
When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
1Select [5: Eco mode].
[On].
2zSelect
z If the camera is not used, the screen
dims in approx. 2 sec. and then turns off
in approx. 10 sec.
zz To reactivate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen has been off
for less than about three minutes, press the shutter button halfway.
zz The camera turns itself off automatically after about three minutes of inactivity
once the screen is off.
435
Power Saving
You can adjust the timing of when the screen and camera turn off
automatically ([Display off] and [Auto power off]).
1Select [5: Power saving].
2Select an item.
zz Even when [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off after
the time set in [Display off].
zz [Display off] and [Auto power off] settings do not apply when Eco mode is
set to [On].
436
Display Brightness
Screen brightness is adjustable.
1Select [5: Disp. brightness].
the adjustment.
2zMake
z Referring to the gray chart, use the
<Y> <Z> keys to adjust the brightness,
then press <0>.
zz To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended
(=312).
437
Date/Time/Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have
been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed
in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and
time information, be sure to set your date/time.
1Select [5: Date/Time/Zone].
zone.
2zSetz Usethethetime
<Y> <Z> keys to select
[Time zone].
zz Press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select the
time zone, then press <0>.
zz If your time zone is not listed, press the
<M> button, then set the difference
from UTC in [Time difference].
438
Date/Time/Zone
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
a [Time difference] item (+/–/hour/
minute), then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>.
zz After entering the time zone or time
difference, use the <Y> <Z> keys to
select [OK], then press <0>.
and time.
3zSetz Usethethedate
<Y> <Z> keys to select an
item, then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>.
saving time.
4zSetz Settheit asdaylight
necessary.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Y],
then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select [Z],
then press <0>.
zz When the daylight saving time is set to
[Z], the time set in step 3 will advance
by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the daylight
saving time will be canceled and the
time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
5zExit
z Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [OK].
439
Date/Time/Zone
zz The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed
to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set
them once again.
zz After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are set.
zz Auto power off time may be extended while the [5: Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.
440
Language
1Select [5: LanguageK].
2Set the desired language.
441
Shutter Button Function for Movies
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway
or completely during movie recording.
[5: Shutter btn function
1Select
for movies].
an item.
2zSelect
z Half-press
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
zz Fully-press
This item is displayed when the shooting
mode switch is set to <k>.
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button completely.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording with the movie shooting button or by pressing the shutter button
completely.
zz [Half-press] switches from [Meter.+One-Shot AF] to [Meter.+k Servo AF]
when [Movie rec. size] is set to [H].
442
Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the frame rates available when you record movies.
1Select [5: Video system].
an item.
2zSelect
z For NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC
(North America, Japan, South Korea,
Mexico, etc.).
zz For PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL
(Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
443
Touch Control
1Select [5: Touch control].
an item.
2zSelect
z [Standard] is the normal setting.
zz [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch-screen panel response than
[Standard].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
zz Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch
operations.
zz Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or
if your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction
may occur. In this case, turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with
a cloth.
zz Attaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen
may degrade the touch operation response.
zz If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be poor.
444
Screen Autolock Settings
To make the camera less likely to detect unintended touch-screen
operations, you can disable shooting screen touch operations after a
specified period.
[5: Screen autolock
1Select
settings].
2Set [Screen autolock] to [Enable].
[Time until locked].
3zSetz Screen
autolock is activated after your
specified time elapses without any
camera operations while the shooting
screen is displayed.
zz Pressing any button cancels screen
autolock.
zz Screen autolock is disabled when menus or playback screens are displayed,
when the screen is facing subjects, and when the camera is autofocusing or
shooting.
445
Beeping
You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations.
1Select [5: Beep].
an item.
2Select
Touch
The beeper will be silent only for touch
operations.
Disable
Disables beeping when subjects are in
focus, when shooting with the self-timer,
when using touch operations, and at other
times.
446
HDMI Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a
television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1Select [5: HDMI resolution].
an item.
2Select
Auto
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you
prefer to avoid display or delay issues
when the camera switches resolution.
447
HDMI HDR Output
You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR TV.
1Select [5: HDMI HDR output].
2Select [On].
zz Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch
inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
zz Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
zz Some image effects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.
448
Shooting Information Display
You can customize the information shown when you are shooting.
Select [5: Shooting info. disp.].
Grid Display
1Select [Grid display].
2Select an item.
449
Shooting Information Display
Histogram
1Select [Histogram disp].
2Select an item.
450
Reverse Display
A mirror image can be displayed when you shoot with the screen rotated
toward the subject (toward the front of the camera).
1Select [5: Reverse display].
[On].
2zSelect
z Select [Off] if you prefer not to reverse
display when the screen is rotated
toward the front.
451
Display Performance
You can specify smooth display or power saving display in still photo
shooting.
1Select [5: Disp. performance].
2Select an item.
452
Reset Camera
M
You can restore default camera settings in [d], [s], [f], [a], [k],
and [M] shooting modes.
1Select [5: Reset camera].
[Basic settings].
2zSelect
z To clear other settings, select [Other
settings], then select an item.
3Select [OK].
zz Basic settings such as [LanguageK] and [Date/Time/Zone] are not restored
to defaults.
zz Dots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen if the
sensor is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors. If so, it may help to reduce
their appearance by doing one of the following with [Basic settings] selected:
(1) Hold down the <I> button and press the <M> button, or (2) Select
[Basic settings], press <0>, then select [OK] (but note that (2) restores
default camera settings).
453
Copyright Information
M
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as
Exif information.
1Select [5: Copyright information].
2Select an item.
text.
3zEnter
z Use the <V> cross keys to select a
character, then press <0> to enter it.
zz To switch input modes, select [ ] and
press <0>.
zz To delete the previous character, select
[ ] and press <0>.
the setting.
4zExit
z Press the <M> button, then
press [OK].
454
Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.]
in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete
the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
zz If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely
when you select [Display copyright info.].
zz You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(EOS software).
455
Manual/Software URL
To download instruction manuals, select
[5: Manual/software URL] and scan the
displayed QR code with a smartphone.
You can also use a computer to access the
website at the URL displayed and download
software.
Certification Logo Display
M
Select [5: Certification Logo Display] to
display some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications. Other certification logos can
be found on the camera body and the
camera’s package.
Firmware
M
Select [5: Firmware] to update the
firmware of the camera or current lens.
456
Custom Functions (C.Fn)
You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of
buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences.
457
Setting Custom Functions
M
1Select [Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
(1)
a Custom Function number
2Select
(1).
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the Custom Function number, then
press <0>.
the setting as desired.
3zChange
z Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired setting (number), then
press <0>.
zz To set up another Custom Function,
repeat steps 2–3.
zz At the bottom of the screen, the current
Custom Function settings are indicated
below the respective function numbers.
the setting.
4zExit
z Press the <M> button.
Clearing all Custom Functions
All Custom Function settings you have set are cleared by selecting
[5: Reset camera], [Other settings], then [Custom Functions(C.Fn)]
(=453).
458
Custom Function Setting Items
M
Custom Functions are organized into two groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Others.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1
ISO expansion
0: Off
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you can set “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200)
for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) for movies. Note that
if [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
“H” cannot be selected.
zz For 4K movies, the ISO speed range is ISO 100–6400, even when
[ISO expansion] is set to [1: On].
C.Fn-2
Safety shift
0: Disable
1: Enable
You can shoot with the shutter speed and aperture value automatically
adjusted to enable standard exposure if standard exposure would not
be available under your specified shutter speed or aperture value in
[s] or [f] mode.
459
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn II: Others
C.Fn-3
Shutter/AE lock button
0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately.
Press the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button
halfway to apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
During Servo AF, you can press the <A> button to pause the AF
operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by
any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is
set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects that keep moving and stopping repeatedly.
During Servo AF, you can press the <A> button to start or stop the
Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is
taken. Thus, you can set your camera to always maintain the optimum
focusing and exposure and wait for the decisive moment.
zz With setting 1 or 3, pressing the <A> button during movie recording starts
One-Shot AF.
C.Fn-4
zMovie shooting button function
You can change the <o> movie shooting button function during still photo
shooting.
0: Movie record start/stop
1: Depth-of-field preview
Stops the lens down to the specified aperture value, enabling you to
check the range of focus (depth of field).
2: Disabled
Disables the <o> button, so that pressing it has no effect.
460
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn-5
Release shutter without lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without
a lens attached to the camera.
0: Disable
1: Enable
C.Fn-6
Retract lens on power off
Lens retraction setting for gear-driven EF or EF-S STM lenses (such as
EF 40mm f/2.8 STM) attached to the camera. You can specify whether to
retract lenses that are extended in use automatically when you turn the
camera off.
0: Enable
1: Disable
zz Retraction is not activated by auto power off (except for EF-M lenses).
zz Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
zz When [0:Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s focus
mode switch setting (AF or MF).
461
462
My Menu
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently.
zz The [9: My Menu] tab is not displayed when [Menu display]
on the [j: Display level settings] tab is set to [Guided].
To set up My Menu, change [Menu display] to [Standard].
463
Tab Menus: My Menu
M
=465
=468
=468
=469
464
Registering My Menu
M
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions
whose settings you change frequently.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1Select [Add My Menu tab].
[OK].
2zSelect
z You can create up to five My Menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1Select [9: Configure].
465
Registering My Menu
2Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3zRegister
z Select the item to be set, then
press <0>.
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
zz You can register up to six items.
zz To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under
the menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
zz Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu.
Select [Sort registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press
<0>. With [z] displayed, use the <W> <X> keys to move the item,
then press <0>.
zz Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the
registered items under the tab.
466
Registering My Menu
zz Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete
the [MY MENU*] tab.
zz Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1Select [Rename tab].
text.
2zEnter
z Select [ ] and press <0> to delete
any unneeded characters.
zz Use the <V> cross keys to select a
character, then press <0> to enter it.
zz To switch input modes, select [ ] and
press <0>.
input.
3zConfirm
z Press the <M> button, then
press [OK].
467
Registering My Menu
Deleting all My Menu tabs/Deleting all items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered
under them.
zz Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete
all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will
be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
zz Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]
is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will
be deleted.
zz If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
468
Registering My Menu
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
zz Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
zz Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
zz Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The [z], [3], [k], [5], and [j] tabs
will not be displayed.)
469
470
Reference
471
Software
You can download the latest version of EOS software or other dedicated
software from the Canon website.
Downloading and Installing the EOS Software or Other
Dedicated Software
Always install the latest version of the software.
Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the
latest version.
zz Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software.
The software will not be installed correctly.
zz The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to the
Internet.
zz Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly.
Also, processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
the software.
1zDownload
z Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
zz Enter the serial number on the back of the screen, then download
the software.
zz Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.
For Macintosh
A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.
472
Software
(1) Double-click the dmg file.
BBA drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon
to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer file.
BBThe installer starts.
2Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the
Canon website to your computer.
zz Software Instruction Manual Download Site
www.canon.com/icpd
zz To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), an Adobe PDF viewing
software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version
recommended) is required.
zz Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
zz Double-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
zz To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section.
473
Importing Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.
There are two ways to do this.
Connecting to a Computer via an Interface Cable
(sold separately)
1Install the software (=472).
the camera to the
2Connect
computer with an interface cable
(sold separately).
zz As an interface cable, you can use a
IFC-600PCU cable (sold separately).
zz Insert the cord’s plug into the camera’s
digital terminal (USB Micro-B).
zz Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal (USB Type-A).
EOS Utility to import the images.
3zUse
z Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
zz With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.
474
Importing Images to a Computer
Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1Install the software (=472).
2Insert the card into the card reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3Use
import the images.
zz Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
zz When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
475
Household Power Outlet Accessory
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E12 and Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (each sold
separately).
the coupler.
1zInsert
z Turn the camera off.
zz Open the cover and insert the coupler
with the terminals facing as shown.
zz Close the cover.
the adapter to the coupler.
2zConnect
z Open the cover and insert the adapter
(2)
plug fully into the coupler terminal.
(1)
the power cord.
3zConnect
z Insert one end of the power cord into
the compact power adapter and plug the
other end into a power outlet.
zz When finished using the camera, turn it
off and unplug the power cord from the
outlet.
zz Do not use an AC adapter other than the Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700.
zz Do not plug in or unplug the adapter or power cord while the camera is on.
zz When finished using the camera, turn it off and unplug the power cord from
the outlet.
476
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact
your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.
zz Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E12.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
zz In case of battery charger problems, the orange charge lamp blinks and
a protective circuit stops charging. If this happens, unplug the charger
plug from the power outlet, remove and reinsert the battery, and wait a
while before plugging the charger into the power outlet again.
The camera is not activated even when turned on.
zz Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (=44).
zz Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (=44).
zz Make sure the card slot cover is closed (=46).
zz Charge the battery (=42).
The access lamp is still lit when the camera is off.
zz The access lamp remains on while the camera is recording images to the
card. The access lamp goes off after image recording is finished, and the
power turns off automatically.
477
Troubleshooting Guide
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
zz Use a fully charged battery (=42).
zz The battery performance may have degraded. If the battery performance
is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
zz The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
zz Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
zz Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
zz Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
zz Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
The camera turns off by itself.
zz Auto power off is in effect. To deactivate auto power off, set [Auto power
off] under [5: Power saving] to [Disable] (=436).
zz Even if [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will still turn
off after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Display off], but the
camera will remain on.
zz Set [5: Eco mode] to [Off].
478
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
zz To attach EF/EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera
cannot be used with RF lenses.
No images can be shot or recorded.
zz Make sure the card is properly inserted (=46).
zz Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (=46).
zz If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make
space (=46, =277).
zz Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to
focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or
focus manually (=57, =185).
The card cannot be used.
zz If a card error message is displayed, see =48 or =493.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in
another camera.
zz Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this
camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed
and it may not be possible to use the card.
479
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.
zz Set [z: Focus mode] to [AF] (=182).
zz When using a lens with a focus mode switch, set the switch to <AF>
(=55).
zz Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (=57).
zz In [z: IS settings], set [IS mode] to [On] (=188).
zz When using a lens with an Image Stabilizer switch, set the switch to
<1> (=188).
zz In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (=106), set a higher ISO speed (=138), use flash (=243),
or use a tripod.
zz See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on =75.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
zz Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus locked is
not possible with Servo AF (=76, =167).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
zz The continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting may be lower,
depending on conditions such as these: battery level, temperature,
shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation,
type of lens, use of flash, and shooting settings (=134).
480
Troubleshooting Guide
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
zz If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the file
size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the
number listed on =495.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
zz The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards,
even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown
in the table on =495 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster
the card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.)
For this reason, the maximum burst displayed may differ from the actual
maximum burst.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image
comes out bright.
zz Set [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (=141). When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come out
bright.
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
the available ISO speed range starts at ISO 200.
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
H (expanded ISO speed) is not available, even with [ISO expansion] in
[5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On].
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], you can set ISO
100/125/160 or H (expanded ISO speed).
481
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual
exposure and ISO Auto are set.
zz See =111 to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
zz Although [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction correction] are
not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both
functions are applied in shooting, as when set to [Enable].
zz During movie recording, [Distortion correction], [Digital Lens
Optimizer], or [Diffraction correction] will not be displayed.
The flash does not fire.
zz Shooting with the flash may be temporarily disabled to protect the flash
head if the flash is used repeatedly over a short period.
Using flash in [f] or [d] mode lowers the shutter speed.
zz To provide standard exposure for subjects and backgrounds, the shutter
speed is automatically reduced (slow-sync shooting) for shots under
low light in night scenes or with similar backgrounds. To prevent a
slow shutter speed, under [z: Flash control], set [Slow synchro] to
[1/200‑1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (=250).
The specified exposure changes when I shoot with ISO Auto
using flash.
zz When there is a risk of overexposure in flash photography, shutter
speed or ISO speed is automatically adjusted to reduce loss of detail in
highlights and shoot at standard exposure. In flash shots with certain
lenses, shutter speeds and ISO speeds displayed when you press the
shutter button halfway may not match the actual settings used. This may
alter the brightness of backgrounds that are out of flash range.
zz To avoid shooting at different shutter speeds or ISO speeds than
displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in [d], [s], [f],
or [a] mode, shoot with a manually set ISO speed.
482
Troubleshooting Guide
Remote control shooting is not possible.
zz When taking still photos, set the drive mode to [Q] (=135).
When recording movies, set [z: Remote control] to [Enable] (=235).
zz Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
zz If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see =191, =387.
A white s or red E icon is displayed during still photo shooting.
zz It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image quality
of still photos may be worse when a white [s] icon is displayed. If the
red [E] icon is displayed, it indicates that the shooting will soon stop
automatically (=192).
During movie recording, the red E icon is displayed.
zz It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red [E]
icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop
automatically (=240).
[
] is displayed.
zz [ ] may be displayed after repeated movie recording, or if you keep the
camera standing by for movie recording over extended periods (except
when set to L6/L5).
The camera turns off automatically in approx. 3 min. if you continue
recording while [ ] is displayed. The camera may also turn off
automatically while standing by for movie recording when [ ] is
displayed. Turn off the camera when [ ] is displayed, and wait to allow
the camera to cool down.
483
Troubleshooting Guide
Movie recording stops by itself.
zz If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see =497. To find out
the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc.
zz If you record a 4K movie for 9 min. 59 sec. or a Full HD/HD movie for
29 min. 59 sec., the movie recording stops automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
zz ISO speed is set automatically in [k] recording mode. In [M] mode,
you can manually set the ISO speed (=499).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot be
selected during movie recording.
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the available ISO
speed range starts at ISO 200.
zz H (expanded ISO speed) is not available when [z: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable], even with [ISO expansion] in [5: Custom
Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On].
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], you can set ISO
100/125/160 or H (expanded ISO speed).
zz H (expanded ISO speed) is not available (not displayed) in 4K movie
recording.
484
Troubleshooting Guide
The exposure changes during movie recording.
zz If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie recording,
the changes in the exposure may be recorded.
zz Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may
cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven
audio level, or loss of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
recording.
zz Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
movie recording. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In [M] mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce
the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie
recording.
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
zz If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.
I cannot take still photos during movie recording.
zz Still photos cannot be taken with the shooting mode switch set to <k>.
Before taking still photos, set the switch to <z>, then select a shooting
mode for still photos.
485
Troubleshooting Guide
Problems with Wireless Features
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
zz Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or
later.
zz Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
zz Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of
charge) on the smartphone (=322).
zz A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again
if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case,
remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on
the smartphone and try pairing again (=329).
Wi-Fi function cannot be set.
zz If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an
interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface
cable before setting any functions (=318).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
zz Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected
to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection before connecting
the interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and
playback may not be possible.
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
486
Troubleshooting Guide
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
zz Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you
have changed the settings or selected a different setting, reconnection
may not be established even after selecting the same SSID. In this case,
delete the camera connection settings from the Wi-Fi settings on the
smartphone and set up a connection again.
zz A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when
you reconfigure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect
for a moment and then restart it.
Operation Problems
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
zz For movie recording, check the [5: Shutter btn function for movies]
setting (=442).
zz Check settings for [Shutter/AE lock button] and [zMovie shooting
button function] in [5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] (=460).
487
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
zz Some tabs and items are not displayed in [A], [D], Special scene,
and Creative filters modes. Tabs and items on the menu screen also vary
for still photos and movies.
zz The [9: My Menu] tab is not displayed when [Menu display] on the
[j: Display level settings] tab is set to [Guided]. To set up My Menu,
change [Menu display] to [Standard].
The display starts with [9] My Menu, or the [9] tab alone is
displayed.
zz [Menu display] on the [9] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or
[Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (=469).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
zz Set [z: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first
character will be an underscore (=153).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
zz It is a movie file.
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
zz If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (=428).
488
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
zz Make sure the correct date and time are set (=438).
zz Check the time zone and daylight saving time (=438).
The date and time are not in the image.
zz The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date
and time recorded in the shooting information (=284).
[###] is displayed.
zz If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
The screen does not display a clear image.
zz If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
zz The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
489
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
A red box is displayed on the image.
zz [3: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (=314).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
zz The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are
played back:
zz Images captured in [F] or [G] Special scene modes.
zz Images captured in [A], [B], [C], or [D] Creative filters modes.
zz Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
zz Cropped images.
The image cannot be erased.
zz If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (=272).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
zz The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another
camera.
zz Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
zz The images have been filtered for playback with [3: Set image search
conditions] (=308). Clear the image search conditions.
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during
movie playback.
zz If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie recording, the
operation sound will also be recorded.
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
zz If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie recording, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In this case, shoot in the [M] mode (=200).
490
Troubleshooting Guide
No picture appears on the television.
zz Make sure [5: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
correctly for the video system of your television (=443).
zz Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (=270).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie recording.
zz If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (=210). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted
with the camera, you can record a movie in a single file even if it exceeds
4 GB.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
zz Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating
system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In this case,
connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable, then
import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software).
The image cannot be resized.
zz With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and RAW images
(=302).
The image cannot be cropped.
zz With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (=300).
491
Troubleshooting Guide
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
zz Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (=472).
zz If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with
any computer connected with an interface cable.
Communication between the connected camera and computer
does not work.
zz When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to
[Disable] (=215).
492
Error Codes
(1)
(2)
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions. If the problem persists,
write down the error code (Err xx) and
contact a Canon Service Center.
(1)
(2)
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
493
Performance Data
Still Photo Shooting
zz Number of Possible Shots
Approx. 315 shots (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• Based on using the screen and a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12, and following
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
zz ISO Auto Range
Shooting Mode
d/s/f/a
ISO Speed
No Flash
With Flash
ISO 100–25600*
ISO 100–1600*
* Varies depending on [Max for Auto] setting.
• ISO speed is set automatically in [A], [D], Special scene, and Creative filters
modes.
• For bulb exposure, the value is automatically set to ISO 400.
494
Performance Data
zz Guide to Image Quality Settings
Image Quality
Pixels
Recorded
(Approx.)
File Size (MB) Possible Shots
Maximum
Burst
JPEG
73
83
74
84
7a
8a
24M
11M
5.9M
3.8M
b
8.4
3600
71
4.5
6610
71
4.6
6480
70
2.6
11400
70
3.1
9690
70
1.8
16010
70
1.8
16340
70
RAW
1
24M
27.2
1120
13
F
24M
15.8
1930
31
1
73
24M
24M
27.2+8.4
850
12
F
73
24M
24M
15.8+8.4
1250
22
RAW+JPEG
• Number of possible shots and maximum burst as measured using a 32 GB UHS-I
card conforming to Canon testing standards.
• File size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting
conditions (such as aspect ratio, subject, memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings).
zz Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.
495
Performance Data
zz Pixel Count at Specific Aspect Ratios
(Approx. pixels)
Image Quality
3:2
4:3
1/F
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
3
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
5328×4000 (21.3 megapixels)*
a
3984×2656 (10.6 megapixels)
3552×2664 (9.5 megapixels)
a
2976×1984 (5.9 megapixels)
2656×1992 (5.3 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels)
2112×1600 (3.4 megapixels)*
Image Quality
16:9
1:1
1/F
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
3
6000×3368 (20.2 megapixels)*
4000×4000 (16.0 megapixels)
a
3984×2240 (8.9 megapixels)*
2656×2656 (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976×1680 (5.0 megapixels)*
1984×1984 (3.9 megapixels)
b
2400×1344 (3.2 megapixels)*
1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
zz The image area displayed for the asterisked “*” aspect ratio may be slightly
different from the actual image area. Check the captured images on the screen
during shooting.
zz The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
zz For details on JPEG file sizes, see the values on =495. Under equivalent
shooting conditions, file sizes will be smaller than when [z: Still img aspect
ratio] is set to [3:2].
496
Performance Data
Movie Recording
zz Cards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Size
H
L
w
SD Card
45
X
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
87
X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
65
X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
23
X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
87
X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
• When [k Digital IS] is disabled.
• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording
movies (card performance requirements).
497
Performance Data
zz Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
(Approx.)
Movie Recording Size
H
L
w
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
8 GB
32 GB
128 GB
File Size
45
X
8 min.
35 min.
2 hr. 21 min.
860 MB/min.
87
X
17 min.
1 hr. 10 min.
4 hr. 43 min.
431 MB/min.
65
X
35 min.
2 hr. 20 min.
9 hr. 23 min.
216 MB/min.
23
X
20 min.
1 hr. 22 min.
5 hr. 28 min.
371 MB/min.
87
X
40 min.
2 hr. 42 min.
10 hr. 49 min.
187 MB/min.
• When [k Digital IS] is disabled.
zzAn increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie recording
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (=240).
zz Total Possible Time for Movie Recording
Approx. 90 min. (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12.
• With [Movie rec. size] under [z: Movie rec quality] set to L6X (NTSC) or
L5X (PAL), and with [z: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].
498
Performance Data
ISO Speed in Movie Recording
In [k]/[M] mode, when set to ISO Auto
zz ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800 for
Full HD/HD movies and ISO 100–6400 for 4K movies.
zz The maximum value in the automatic setting range is expanded
to H (equivalent to ISO 25600) in Full HD/HD movie recording when
[ISO expansion] in [5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] is set to [1: On]
(=459) and then [Max for Auto] in [z: kISO speed settings] is
set to [H (25600)] (=236). Note that in 4K movie recording, maximum
ISO speed expansion is not available ([Max for Auto] is not available),
even with [ISO expansion] set to [1: On]).
zz With [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (=142), the minimum
value in the automatic setting range is ISO 200. Maximum ISO speed
expansion is not performed, even with [Max for Auto] set to [H (25600)].
In [M] mode with ISO speed set manually
zz ISO speed can be set manually in a range of ISO 100–12800 for
Full HD/HD movies and ISO 100–6400 for 4K movies.
zz The maximum value in the manual setting range is expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600) in Full HD/HD movie recording with
[ISO expansion] in [5: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On].
Note that in 4K movie recording, maximum ISO speed expansion is not
available ([H] is not displayed), even with [ISO expansion] set to [1: On].
zz With [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (=142), the minimum
value in the manual setting range is ISO 200. Maximum ISO speed
expansion is not performed, even with [ISO expansion] set to [1: On].
499
Performance Data
Image Playback
zz Resize Options by Original Image Quality
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Quality
4
a
3
k
k
k
k
k
4
b
k
a
zz Size for Resized Images
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
3:2
4:3
3552×2664 (9.5 megapixels)
4
3984×2656 (10.6 megapixels)
a
2976×1984 (5.9 megapixels)
2656×1992 (5.3 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels)
2112×1600 (3.4 megapixels)*
Image
Quality
16:9
1:1
4
3984×2240 (8.9 megapixels)*
2656×2656 (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976×1680 (5.0 megapixels)*
1984×1984 (3.9 megapixels)
b
2400×1344 (3.2 megapixels)*
1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
zz The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
zz The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
500
Information Display
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(14)
(15)
(16)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Movie recording time available
Maximum burst
Possible shots/Sec. until selftimer shoots
(4) Multi Shot Noise Reduction
(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(6) Focus method
(7) AF operation
(8) Metering mode
(9) Drive mode/Self-timer
(10) Image quality
(11) Movie recording size
(12) AF point
(25)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
Grid lines
Battery level
Histogram
Temperature warning
Limited movie recording available
Quick Control
White balance/White balance
correction
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Creative filters
Still image aspect ratio
Touch Shutter
Metering area
501
Information Display
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(32)
(33)
(26) Flash exposure compensation/
Flash output level
(27) Camera shake warning
(28) Self Portrait
(29) Flash mode/FE lock
(30) AE lock
(31) Shutter speed
(32) Aperture value
(33) Exposure level indicator
(34) GPS acquisition status
(35) Wi-Fi function
(36) Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
(37) Bluetooth function
(38) Magnify button
(39) ISO speed
(40) Highlight tone priority
(41) Exposure simulation
(42) Exposure compensation
zz Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
502
Information Display
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(10)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Movie orientation information
Battery level
Movie recording time available/
Elapsed recording time
(4) Recording mode/Time-lapse
movie
(5) Focus method
(6) Movie self-timer
(7) Movie recording size
(8) Movie digital IS
(9) Video snapshot
(10) Movie Servo AF
(11) Sound recording off
(12) AF point
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
Temperature warning
Limited movie recording available
Histogram (for manual exposure)
Quick Control
Movie recording start button
White balance/White balance
correction
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Miniature effect movie
GPS acquisition status
Magnify button
503
Information Display
(30)
(24)
(31)
(32)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(33)
(34)
(29)
(24) Sound-recording level indicator
(manual)
(25) Output without information display
(26) AE lock
(27) Shutter speed
(28) Aperture value
(29) Exposure level indicator
(35)
(30) Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
(31) Bluetooth function
(32) ISO speed
(33) Highlight tone priority
(34) Wi-Fi function
(35) Exposure compensation
zz The grid, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie recording.
(The display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)
zz When movie recording starts, the movie recording time available will change to
the elapsed recording time.
zz Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
504
Information Display
Scene Icons
In the [A] or [D] shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Portrait
Non-Portrait
In Motion*1
Background
Nature/
Outdoor
Scene
In
Motion*1
Close*2
Bright
Background
Color
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*3
Sunset
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With Tripod*
Dark blue
1
4 5
**
*
3
4 5
**
*
3
*1: Not displayed during movie recording.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
zz For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
505
Information Display
Playback Screen
zz Basic information display for still photos
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
Battery level
Playback No./Total images/
Number of found images
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure compensation amount
Bluetooth function
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Already sent to a computer/
smartphone
Rating
Image protection
Folder number-File number
Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
zz If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.
zz It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
506
Information Display
zz Detailed information display for still photos
(8)
(1)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(2)
(3)
(13)
(14)
(4)
(15)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
White balance
Auto Lighting Optimizer
White balance correction
Picture Style/Settings
Exposure compensation amount
Shooting date and time
(16)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Histogram
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Flash exposure compensation/
HDR shooting/Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
(14) Metering mode
(15) File size
(16) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect
ratio set (=125) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, [0] will be displayed.
* [M] will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* [u] will be displayed for images created and saved after performing resizing,
cropping, Creative Assist, or red-eye correction.
* [N] will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.
507
Information Display
zz Detailed information display for movies
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Quick Control
Movie playback
Recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Video snapshot
Movie orientation information
Image size
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Frame rate
Movie digital IS
Recording time
Movie recording format
Compression method
zz During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold]
of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
508
Trademarks
zz Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
zz Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
zz Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
zz SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
zz HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
zz The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
zz WPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi
Protected Setup.
zz The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
zz All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
509
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use
for MPEG-4 standard.”
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES
IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO’’) AND/
OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
510
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be
covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
zz Battery Pack LP-E12 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents
for which Canon cannot be held liable.
511
Index
Numbers
1-point AF : 170, 175
[4K] 3840×2160 (Movie) : 205
4K frame capture : 266
A
Access lamp : 45, 47
Accessories : 3
Add movie orientation/rotation info : 432
Adobe RGB : 153
Advanced shooting modes : 103
AE lock : 189
AF
AF-assist beam : 169, 184
AF method : 170
AF operation : 167
AF point selection : 175
Area AF frame : 86
Beep (Beeper) : 446
Continuous AF : 181
Eye detection AF : 180
Lens electronic MF : 183
Manual focus : 185
Recomposing : 76
Album (video snapshot) : 224, 297
ALL-I : 207
Ambience priority (AWB) : 149
Angle of view : 53
Aperture-priority AE : 108
Area AF frame : 86
Art bold effect : 293
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 72
Aspect ratio → Still image aspect ratio
Attenuator : 214
Autofocus → AF
Auto Lighting Optimizer : 141
Auto power off : 436
Auto reset : 430
512
Auto rotate : 431
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 108
B
Background music : 299
Basic information display : 506
Basic shooting modes : 71
Battery → Power
Beep (Beeper) : 446
Bluetooth function : 321, 387
Address : 394
Connecting : 323
Bulb exposure : 112
BUSY : 124
C
Camera
Camera vibration blur : 113, 136
Default settings : 453
Holding the camera : 56
Camera shake : 57, 75
Card requirements : 208, 497
Cards : 11, 35, 46
Formatting : 433
Low-level formatting : 433
Troubleshooting : 48, 479
Write protection : 46
Center-weighted average metering : 143
Certification Logo : 456
Charger : 42
Charging : 42
Chromatic aberration correction : 131
Close-up : 87
Color space : 153
Color temperature : 151
Color tone : 158
Combination IS : 234
Continuous (file numbering) : 429
Index
Continuous shooting : 133
Contrast : 141, 158
Copyright information : 454
Creative Assist : 78, 294
Creative filters : 291
Cropping (images) : 300
Custom Functions : 457
Custom white balance : 150
D
Date/time : 438
Daylight saving time : 439
DC coupler : 476
Default settings : 453
Custom Functions : 458
Flash function settings : 252
My Menu : 468
Wireless communication : 402
Depth-of-field preview : 109
Dial : 58
Diffraction correction : 131
Digital Lens Optimizer : 130
Digital terminal : 474
Display level : 60
Display off : 436
Distortion correction : 129
Double-tap : 258
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) : 284
Dragging : 68
Drive mode : 133
E
Eco mode : 435
Erasing (images) : 277
Err (error codes) : 493
Error messages : 493
Evaluative metering : 143
exFAT : 210, 434
Expanded ISO speed : 138, 236, 499
Exposure compensation : 137
Exposure compensation in M mode
with ISO Auto : 111
Exposure level indicator : 502
Exposure simulation : 146
F
Face+Tracking : 170, 173
FAT32 : 210, 434
Feature guide : 62
FE lock : 247
File extension : 122, 207
File size : 210, 495, 498
Filter effect (Monochrome) : 159
Fine (Image quality) : 122
Firmware : 456
First-curtain synchronization : 252
Fish-eye effect : 98, 292
Flash : 244
Effective range : 244
FE lock : 247
Flash control (function settings) : 248
Flash exposure compensation : 252
Flash photography : 244
Manual flash : 251
Red-eye reduction : 249
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) : 252
Slow synchro : 250
Flash exposure compensation : 246, 252
Flash mode : 251
Focusing → AF
Focus lock : 76
Focus mode switch : 55
Folder creation/selection : 426
Food : 88
Formatting : 433
Formatting (card initialization) : 433
Frame Grab : 266
513
Index
Frame rate : 207, 443
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
(movie) : 205
Handheld night scene : 90
[HD] 1280×720 (Movie) : 205
HDMI : 238, 270, 447
HDMI HDR : 448
HDMI output : 238
HDR art bold : 99
HDR art embossed : 99
HDR art standard : 99
HDR art vivid : 99
HDR Backlight Control : 91
High Frame Rate : 209
High ISO speed noise reduction : 163
Highlight tone priority : 142
Histogram : 312, 450
Household power : 476
Histogram : 312
Image review time : 127
Importing (to computer) : 474
Index display : 260
Jump display (image browsing) : 310
Magnifying images : 259
Manual reset : 430
Manual rotation : 275
Playback : 253
Protecting images : 272
Rating : 303
Search conditions : 308
Shooting information : 257, 507
Slide show : 306
TV display : 270
Image search : 308
Image stabilization : 188
Importing images to a computer : 474
Index display : 260
INFO button : 59
IPB : 207
ISO speed : 138, 236
ISO Auto range : 494
ISO expansion : 459
Max for Auto : 140, 236
I
J
ICC profile : 153
Icons : 9
Image browsing (jump display) : 310
Image quality : 122, 495
Image review time : 127
Images
AF point display : 314
Auto reset : 430
Auto rotation : 431
Continuous (file numbering) : 429
Erasing : 277
File numbering : 428
JPEG : 495
Jump display : 310
G
GPS : 396
Grainy B/W : 98, 292
Grid display : 449
H
514
L
Landscape : 85
Language : 441
Large (image quality) : 122
Lens : 52, 54
Chromatic aberration correction : 131
Diffraction correction : 131
Digital Lens Optimizer : 130
Distortion correction : 129
Index
Focus mode switch : 55
Lock release : 53, 55
Optical aberration correction : 128
Peripheral illumination correction : 129
Lens electronic MF : 183
Location information : 396
Long (bulb) exposures : 112
Long Exposure Noise Reduction : 162
M
M (Manual exposure) : 110
Magnifying images : 177, 185, 259
Malfunction : 477
Manual exposure : 110
Manual focus : 185
Manual reset : 430
Maximum burst : 124, 495
Medium (image quality) : 122
Memory cards → Cards
Menu : 63
Dimmed menu items : 67
Display level : 60
Function settings : 424
Movie recording : 196
My Menu : 465
Playback : 254
Setting procedure : 64
Still photo shooting : 117
Wireless communication
functions : 318
Menu display : 61
Metering mode : 143
Metering timer : 145
MF (Manual focusing) : 185
MF peaking : 187
Miniature effect : 99, 101, 229, 293
Monochrome : 155, 159
Movies : 195
AE lock : 199
Attenuator : 214
Autoexposure recording : 198
Auto slow shutter : 239
Cards that can record movies : 497
Compression method : 207
Editing : 264, 268
Editing out first and last scenes : 264
File size : 210, 498
Frame Grab : 266
Frame rate : 207
Grid display : 449
HDMI output : 238, 447
Information display : 503
Manual exposure recording : 200
Movie digital IS : 233
Movie recording size : 205
Movie Servo AF : 231
Playback : 261
Recording time : 211, 498
Sound recording/
Sound-recording level : 213
Time-lapse movie : 215
Video snapshot : 224
Wind filter : 213
MP4 : 207
Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 163
My Menu : 465
N
Night Portrait : 89
Noise reduction
High ISO speed : 163
Long (bulb) exposures : 162
Normal (Image quality) : 122
NTSC : 207, 443
Number of pixels : 122, 495
O
One-Shot AF : 168
515
Index
P
P (Program AE) : 104
PAL : 207, 443
Partial metering : 143
Part names : 36
Peripheral illumination correction : 129
Photobook set-up : 288
Picture Style : 154, 157, 160
Playback : 253
Portrait : 83
Possible recording time (movie) : 498
Possible shots : 494
Power : 50
Auto power off : 436
Battery level : 51
Charging : 42
Household power : 476
Possible shots : 494
Power saving : 436
Pressing completely : 57, 442
Pressing halfway : 57, 442
Printing
Photobook set-up : 288
Print order : 284
Program AE : 104
Program shift : 105
Protecting images : 272
Q
[Q] (Quick Control) : 69
Quick Control : 69
R
Rating : 303
RAW : 123
RAW+JPEG : 122, 495
Red-eye reduction : 249
Reduced display : 260
Remote controller : 191
516
Resizing : 302
Rotating (images) : 275, 431
Rotating (movies) : 276
S
Safety instructions : 30
Safety shift : 459
Saturation : 158
Scene icons : 77, 505
Scene Intelligent Auto : 72
Screen : 34, 49
Angle adjustment : 49
Brightness : 437
SD/SDHC/SDXC cards → Cards
Second-curtain synchronization : 252
Self Portrait : 82
Self-timer : 135, 212
Sensitivity → ISO speed
Sepia (Monochrome) : 159
Servo AF
Movie Servo AF : 231
SERVO : 168
SERVO (Servo AF) : 168
Sharpness : 158
Shooting information display : 449, 501
Shooting mode
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 72
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 108
Creative filters : 96
M (Manual exposure) : 110
P (Program AE) : 104
Special scene mode : 80
Switch : 38
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 106
Shutter button : 57
Shutter button functions : 442
Shutter-priority AE : 106
Shutter synchronization : 252
Silent : 92
Index
Single-image display : 256
Single shooting : 133
Slide show : 306
Small (image quality) : 122
Smooth skin : 84
Soft focus : 98, 292
Software : 472
Instruction Manual : 473
Sound recording/
Sound-recording level : 213
Special scene mode : 80
Sports : 86
Spot AF : 170, 175
Spot metering : 143
sRGB : 153
Still image aspect ratio : 125, 496
Strap : 40
T
Temperature warning : 192, 240
Tilt correction : 301
Time-lapse movie : 215
Time zone : 438
Tone priority : 142
Toning effect (Monochrome) : 159
Touch beeping : 446
Touch operation : 68, 258, 444
Touch Shutter : 165
Toy camera effect : 98, 293
Troubleshooting : 477
TV display : 270
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 106
U
UHS-I : 11
USB (digital) terminal : 474
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) : 398
V
Video snapshot : 224
Video system : 443
Volume (movie playback) : 262, 263
W
Water painting effect : 98, 293
WB (White balance) : 147
White balance (WB) : 147
Ambience priority : 149
Auto : 149
Color temperature setting : 151
Correction : 152
Custom : 150
White priority (AWB) : 149
Wi-Fi function : 317
Airplane mode : 401
Android : 322
Camera access point mode : 385
Camera Connect : 322, 327
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY : 367
Clearing wireless communication
settings : 402
Connection history : 390, 393
Edit device information : 345, 399
EOS Utility : 349
Erase connection information : 400
Image Transfer Utility 2 : 354
iOS : 322
IP address : 385
MAC address : 403
Network : 332, 350, 358
Network settings : 419
Nickname : 400
Notes : 416
Pairing : 324
Password : 393
PictBridge : 357
Printer : 357
517
Index
Printing : 359
Print settings : 362
Reconnecting : 390
Remote operation : 327
Resize image : 335, 340, 375
Sending all images
on the card : 341, 378
Sending images that match
search conditions : 342, 379
Send selected : 337, 374
SSID : 332, 350, 358
Switch network : 383
Viewable images : 345
View info screen : 403
Viewing images : 327
Virtual keyboard : 404
Wi-Fi settings : 393
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) : 382
Wind filter : 213
Wireless communication : 317
Z
Zone AF : 171, 175
518
519
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of July 2019.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SX8BA210
© CANON INC. 2019
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising